2017 Chrysler Pacifica Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2017-pacifica

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 828

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2017
OWNER’S MANUAL

Pacifica

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE
1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

MULTIMEDIA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

▫ Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .6

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman- your satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
that are traditional to our vehicles.
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Symbols
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2

CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Exterior Mirrors

4 — Doors
5 — Wheels/Tires
6 — Headlights

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9

REAR VIEW
2

Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate

10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4

— Air Vents
— Multifunction Lever
— Instrument Cluster
— Windshield Wiper Lever

5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—

Glove/Storage Compartment
Ignition
Steering Wheel
Headlight Switch

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11

INTERIOR
2

Interior Features
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Power Window/Door Lock Switches
Electronic Gear Selector
Uconnect Radio
Switch Panel

5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—

Door handle
Climate Control
Center Console
Seats

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . .33
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 SENTRY KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .38
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) . . . . . . . . . . .59

䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Manual Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .43
▫ Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

▫ Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped .87
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .90

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . .44

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

▫ Manual Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .97

▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .50

▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks . . . . . . . . .98

▫ Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped . . . . . .54 䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Safe Lock Device — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .55

▫ Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫ Child Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Head Restraints — Second Row . . . . . . . . . . .100

䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

▫ Head Restraints — Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . .100

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

▫ Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .108

▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .109

▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . .102

▫ Conversation Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .104

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .105

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .111

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .112

▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .107

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .113
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .113

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . .115

▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .122

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . .115
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . .118
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .120
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Manual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
䡵 TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .165

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

▫ Power Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .156 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .175
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .176

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .180

▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .192

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

▫ Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage . . . .200

▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .201
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .199

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

NOTE: The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob)
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
with a built in emergency key and a keyless push button
emergency key with you when valet parking.
Ignition system.
KEYS

RKE Key Fob
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held RKE Key Fob. The RKE key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.

Three Button RKE Key Fob

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Four Button RKE Key Fob

Five Button RKE Key Fob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

Six Button RKE Key Fob

Seven Button RKE Key Fob

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

To Unlock The Doors

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
to unlock either the driver’s side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “MultimeOperation is subject to the following two conditions:
dia” for further information.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
2. This device must accept any interference received,
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
including interference that may cause undesired opFob once to unlock the front and rear driver doors or
eration.
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors liftgate. The
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the The illuminated entry system will be activated.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be
activated.

First Push Unlock

Second Push Unlock

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The RKE Key Fob also contains and an emergency key,
which stores in the bottom of the RKE Key Fob.

Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking
the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with your thumb Key
and pull the emergency key out with your other hand
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
while pushing the mechanical button.
doors will lock. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash
once and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the
signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp
only, or both.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again only if the
key is inside the passenger compartment.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechanical release button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with
Emergency Key Removal
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
hand.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the plastic mechanical attachment points.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Separating The RKE Key Fob Case

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped

This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability
to identify a specific vehicle key for which a customized
category of vehicle settings can be applied to determine
the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is specific settings for the first time.
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE Key
Fobs. Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed at This feature also has additional features that are always
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro- enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron- by the vehicle owner. While this specific RKE Key Fob is
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This
programmed.
includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased
driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

Start Up Display Features
• Unique splash screen graphic
• Telltale

illuminated

• After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed.
The following features are always enabled when this key
is in use:

KeySense RKE Key Fob

KeySense Unique Splash Screen

• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied Seat
Belts are not Fastened
• Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime

At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the • Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense
• Daytime Running Lights
mode when the KeySense key is in use.
For additional information please refer to “Uconnect
Settings” located in “Multimedia.”

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key
Fob is in the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot
on the brake pedal.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition

The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

ACC
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are still available.
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or dead NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the RKE Key Fob is
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to located inside the cargo area AND the liftgate is opened.
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the instrument
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle start prematurely:
while still maintaining security. The system has
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
a range of 328 ft (100 m).
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below
40° F (4.4° C).
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
NOTE:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE Key Fob the ON/RUN position.
may reduce this range.

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

How To Use Remote Start

• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

All of the following conditions must be met before the • Fuel level meets minimum requirement
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

To Enter Remote Start Mode

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals
will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the
Remote Start mode.
Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the
• For security, power window operation is disabled end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
STOP button.

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the 3.5”
EVIC or 7” DID until you push the START button.

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped

When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control,
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
vented seats (if equipped) are also activated in temperatimer and operation will continue.
tures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats,
and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures General Information
below 40° F (4.4° C).. These features will stay on through The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti- with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

2. This device must accept any interference received, used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
including interference that may cause undesired op- shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob
is used to start the engine.
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posiby the party responsible for compliance could void the tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
SENTRY KEY
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The RKE Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these condisystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation tions will result in the engine being shut off after two
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked seconds.
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
RKE Key Fob that are programmed to the vehicle can be

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.

will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
And Operating⬙ for further information).
provides both audible and visible signals. If something
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will proPassive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
is OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
vehicle:
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
information).
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob available in
position.
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
— Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/
for further information).
STOP button (requires at least one valid RKE Key
• Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
Fob in the vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them.

NOTE:

To Disarm The System

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
door, the alarm will sound.
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your DOORS
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the Manual Lock
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
visible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

Manual Front Door Lock location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle

Manual Door Lock Rocker Switch

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
NOTE:
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Manual Rear Door Lock location
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped

Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 — Unlock Power Switch

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim 2 — Lock Power Switch
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to remove the RKE Key Fob.

For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
push the RKE key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Equipped
NOTE:
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, disabling passive entry will also disable the hands free
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed
sliding doors and liftgate closures. Refer to “Uconnect
into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
(the gear selector has been placed out of PARK and all
doors closed).
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reoperate if there is any manual operation of the power
sponse time.
door locks (lock or unlock).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• If the child safety locks have been engaged the sliding
side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the
hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid RKE key fob within 3ft (1 m) of the drivers
door handle, grab the drivers front door handle to unlock
the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. The interior door panel rocker knob will rotate
when the door is unlocked.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of
the driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati- • A lock request is made by a valid RKE key fob while a
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
door is open.
the door is unlocked.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
handle while a door is open.
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is open.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of RKE key fob In
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
finds a RKE key fob inside the car, and it does not find
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a any RKE key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock
RKE key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry and alert the customer.
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid RKE key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid RKE key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:

To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate,
cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.

NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is pro• The doors are manually locked using the door lock grammed, only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate
knobs.
release handle is pushed. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
• There is a valid RKE key fob outside the vehicle and is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock
within 3 ft (1 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. when the liftgate release handle is pushed. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multidoor panel switch and then close the doors.
media” for further information.
NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the RKE key fob can be locked in the vehicle.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
With one of the vehicle’s RKE key fobs within 3 ft (1 m) handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the
door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and the
liftgate.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
hold open latch in order to close the door.
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to To keep your door operating properly, observe the folallow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling lowing guidelines:
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and • Always open the door smoothly.
unlocking.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
transmitter battery is dead.
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button, or the lock button located on the
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
Manual Sliding Side Door
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
exterior handle.
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
NOTE:

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.

Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

The power sliding door may be power opened or closed The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
in several ways:
operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways
require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
• RKE key fob
equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
• inside or outside handles
outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will
unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive
• the following buttons located
Entry RKE Key Fob within 3ft (1m) of the door handle.
• in the overhead console
NOTE: Opening or closing the hands free sliding door (if
• just inside the sliding door
equipped) requires a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m)
• on the outside handle
of the door handle. If Passive Entry is turned off in the
Uconnect Settings this feature will not be functional.
• Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or
to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
• when the door is fully closed, the door will open.
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
• when the door is fully open, the door will close.
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
• when the door is moving, the door will reverse.
sliding doors. The power OFF LED, in the overhead
Push the button on the RKE key fob twice within five console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door.
Using any of the above ways:

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power OFF
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with sliding door movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in ‘Uconnect Settings’.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers.

Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
sliding doors.
NOTE:
• The sliding door will not power open or close if the
gear selector is not in Park or Neutral.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch

If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door will reverse direction.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door

• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the power sliding door must
be opened or closed manually.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.

Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped
Hands-Free Feature

WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while driving.

Hands-Free Sliding Doors

To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
gentle single forward and back kicking motion under the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s). • If anything obstructs the power sliding doors while it
Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion
is closing or opening, the sliding doors will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
or the sensors may not detect the motion.
meets sufficient resistance.
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors
requires a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft • If the power sliding doors encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will
(1 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE
automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
Key Fob is not within 3 ft (1 m), the door will not respond
to any kicks.
opened or closed manually.
NOTE: The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be
turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. The
Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off
during Jacking, Tire Changing, and Service.
NOTE:

Safe Lock Device — If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
may be overridden by pushing the OFF side of the Power
Switch located in the front overhead console.

When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
• The sliding doors will not power open or close if the position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
gear selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-Pillar
trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
0 mph (0 km/h).
the inside power sliding door handle.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Safety Locks have been engaged
the sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside
using the hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Overhead Console Buttons
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Liftgate
Right Sliding Door
Power Door Power Off
Left Sliding Door

2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

NOTE:
• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
door handle will not open the sliding door when the
Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.

Child Protection Door Locks

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.

• The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid
unintentional operation of the power sliding door
from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power Off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit when the handles are
manual and the buttons just inside the sliding doors
are disabled. When the overhead console power OFF

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power opened 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
NOTE:
doors or pulling on the handles.
• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
WARNING!
sliding door closed to make certain the Child ProtecAvoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
tion Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
door handle will open the sliding door when the Child
from the outside door handle or the switches located
Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks SEATS
are engaged.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING! (Continued)

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)

Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
Manual Seat Adjuster

For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide is located on the outboard side of the seat.
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.

1 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
2 — Recline Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)

normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its

Recline Lever

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever

NOTE:
• The seatback may lock into the fold flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

• When returning the seat to the original position, the Easy Entry
headrest must be folded back to the original position.
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The 2nd row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry
into the third row with or without a child seat installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
handle that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.

Fold Headrest To Upward Position

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Easy Tilt Seat Lever

Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed

2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull
back on the seatback and lock the seat into position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67

WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death my occur.
3
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by
pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the
seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the
arm rests are folded up.

Recliner Lever

2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will
tilt forward.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Exit For 3rd Row Passengers
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the seat forward for folding the
seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor.

Pull Strap

3. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then
pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the
arm rests.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

NOTE: This process is for when there is no child seat The Stow ‘n Go Assist feature is available to both the
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is front driver and passenger power seats.
installed.
Stow ’n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Stow ‘n Go Assist — If Equipped

WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not
occupied and the seat travel path is clear.

A one-touch Stow ‘n Go Assist button is located on the
On vehicles equipped with the Stow ‘n Go Assist feature, B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door.
the front seat will move forward automatically to a
location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement, without interference by the front seat. After
the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement is completed,
the front seat will automatically move back to the previous location once the Stow ‘n Go Assist button is pushed
again.

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Using the Stow ‘n Go Assist Feature
NOTE:
• The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is
not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Drivers Information Display (DID).

Stow ‘n Go Assist button

• If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in the EVIC or DID.
1. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button. The
front seat cushion and seat back will move as necessary to a location that will allow space for the second
row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71

2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go” for further information.

location. A message will be displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
detected.

3. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button a • If the front seat is already in a location that will allow
second time. The front seat cushion and seat back will
space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front
seat will not move and a message will be displayed in
return to the original starting location.
the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
• If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press
automatically re-calibrate when the Stow ‘n Go Assist
the Stow n’ Go Assist button, or press the front power
button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion
seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the
moving forward and downward, before moving to the
Stow ‘n Go Assist button again will return the front
location that will allow space for the second row Stow
seat to the original starting location.
‘n Go seat movement.
• The Stow ‘n Go Assist system includes obstacle detecSecond Row Stow ’n Go
tion. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will
stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seat back all the way forward

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of
the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped.) Refer to ⬙Stow
’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙ in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
locked position.

Lock Rod

NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73

• For information on storage bin function with the 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats rearward refer to “Second Row Floor Storage
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
Bins” in “Internal Equipment” for further informaagainst the front seats.
tion.
3

2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.

Push Panel Forward

Floor Latch

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Stow the seat by grabbing the strap on the lower part 5. Push down on the seat back to lock the seat in the tub.
of the back seat and guide the seat into the tub.

Push To Lock
Pull Strap

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

6. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.

Push To Lock

8. Readjust the front seat as needed.
Extend Floor Panel

7. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise damage to the seat may occur.

WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

To Unstow Second Row Seats
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using the manual
seat adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped). Refer to ⬙Stow
’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙ in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
locked position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.

Lock Rod

NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.

Floor Latch

3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back
before folding into the upright position.

Push Panel Forward

4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out
of the storage bin. Push the seat rearward making sure
that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the
upright position and pull the headrest up.

Pull Strap

5. To position the floor panel back into its original state,
grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79

Extend Panel

Push Down To lock

6. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks 7. Readjust the front seat as needed.
into position. Replace the floor mat as needed.

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If Equipped

Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap

While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near
the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
and removable for added cargo space.
release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be
removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward
direction from the detent positions in the floor.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

Release Strap

In Floor Detent Guides

NOTE: Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.

WARNING!

To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back
into its original position.

If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.

3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.

2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.

Strap “2”

Release Strap “1”

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83

2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.

Stowed Third Row Seat

To Unfold Third Row Seats
Strap “2”

1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the 3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
anchors latch.

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Driver Power Seat Switches

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power 1 — Seat Switch
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat 2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

CAUTION! (Continued)

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
(Continued)

WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped

CAUTION!

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next
to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button,
the seat will move in the direction of the button press.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch

Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89

NOTE:
• The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
• The center head restraint raises and lowers manually
but will not lower automatically.

• The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back off the seat. Refer to
⬙Head Restraints - Third Row⬙ in ⬙Head Restraints⬙ for
further information.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.

Rear Panel Power Switch Bank

The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and 1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:

3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats

90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To move the selected seat(s) to the Normal (seated) • To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a
position, push and release the Normal button. The seat
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
will automatically stop when the Normal position is
can be selected.
reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push • The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
and release the Stow button. The seat will automatically
motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
stop when the Stow position is reached.
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
again.
reverse direction, push and hold the Fold forward or
rearward button. Release the button when the desired Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
position is reached.
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fobs can also be programmed
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
row seats.
pushed.
NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91

Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE key
fobs, one RKE key fob can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
Driver Memory Switch
1 — Memory Button 1
2 — Set Button
3 — Memory Button 2

3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis- NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fob you
play (DID) will display which memory position has must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob”
feature through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to
been set.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further inforNOTE:
mation.
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
To program your RKE Key Fob, perform the following:
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Key Fob To Memory
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
Your RKE Key Fob can be programmed to recall one of
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93

5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
Fob within 10 seconds.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat stop moving.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fob can be unlinked to your
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
be selected.
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
NOTE: Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
button on the RKE Key Fob.
memory mirror recall.
Memory Position Recall
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
Only)
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC or This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
DID.
vehicle.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 1. you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK • When the ignition switch transitions to the LOCK
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to Memory Position 2.

94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition switch transtions out of the
LOCK position.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled through the programmable features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
• When the ignition switch transitions out of the LOCK Information Display (DID). For further information refer
position, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver Panel”.
seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7
Heated Seats — If Equipped
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition switch tran- Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
sitions out of the LOCK position.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.

the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95

• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.

once to turn the HI • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.

• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.

a second time to turn

• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.

a third time to turn

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min- system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display further information.
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apWARNING!
proximately 45 minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
NOTE:
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
two to five minutes.
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.

Second Row Heated Seat Switch

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97

Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
HI and LO.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within two to five minutes.
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
once to choose HI.
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of • Press the ventilated seat button
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal • Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
choose LO.
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
a third time to
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis- • Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
approximately 45 minutes.
seats to operate.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move

98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

HEAD RESTRAINTS

On models that are equipped with remote start, the Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
remote start.
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
WARNING!
further information.
The head restraints for all occupants must be propPlastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
handles are built into the seatbacks of the first and third
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
row rear seats. The floor supports the partial weight of Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
the bagged goods.
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99

Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. Front head restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
Front Head Restraint
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head 1 — Release Button
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and 2 — Adjustment Button
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved visibility while in reverse. Pull the
release strap to fold them forward.

Head Restraints — Second Row
The second row outboard head restraints are nonadjustable. The removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped) has an adjustable head restraint.
Release Strap

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101

NOTE:

Press the Head Restraint Fold button
the third row head restraints.

to power fold

• The head restraints must be raised manually when
NOTE:
occupying the third row.

• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third • The head restraints can be folded downward using the
Head Restraint button or using the manual release
row seats.
strap. The head restraints must be raised manually
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
when occupying the third row.
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further informa- • Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
tion.
row seats.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
Uconnect display.
located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.

102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever

To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
approximately 120 minutes before automatically shutting
off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may
not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103

The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.

once to

• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.

a second

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
reverse.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will autoTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight mirror adjusts.
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
Outside Mirrors

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Seats” for
further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Power Mirror Controls
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Controls” for further information.
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ground rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
mirror will move slightly downward from the present pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The to the normal driving position.
driver’s outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver’s
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Folding Mirror Switch

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109

If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
will automatically unfold.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatiResetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

Illuminated Mirror

110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Conversation Mirror

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Located in the overhead console there is a conversation Headlight Switch
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and the fog lights.

Conversation Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent
for headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

Headlight Switch
1
2
3
4

— Rotate Headlight Switch
— Ambient Dimmer Control
— Instrument Panel Dimmer
— Fog Lamps Button

This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay
on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch
OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight
switch counterclockwise to the O (OFF) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.

112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, select the proper
setting through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.

Headlight Delay — If Equipped

NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Lights-On Reminder
while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned
OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is
activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle
will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation.
Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights
off.

Fog Lights Switch

Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the
turn signals, headlight beams and flash-to-pass functions.

114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Warning
Multifunction Lever
1 — Turn Signals
2 — Headlight Beams Low/High
3 — Flash-To-Pass

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and
a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115

Lane Change Assist — If Equipped

Automatic High Beam — If Equipped

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash forward lighting at night by automating high beam
three times then automatically turn off.
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light
High/Low Beam Switch
and automatically switches from high beams to low
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi- beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
operation.
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
Flash-To-Pass
or camera lens will cause the system to function impropYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights by erly.
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This To Activate
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
remain on until the lever is released.
Uconnect system. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
AUTO (A) position.
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
to the on position.
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
Battery Protection
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are
left on for extended periods of time when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the
Automatic High Beam system.
headlight switch in any position other than OFF or
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
“Multimedia” for further information.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
To Deactivate

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting

To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver’s or
passenger light switch.

The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy NOTE:
lights On/Off.
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped

Courtesy Light Switches

Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding
door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn
on when the UNLOCK button ON the RKE Key Fob is
pushed.

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
the lens to turn these lights ON while inside the vehicle. The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
Push the lens a second time to turn each light OFF.
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Reading Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119

Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.

Instrument Panel Dimmer

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the right (instrument panel) dimmer control to the
off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
Washer And Wiper Controls

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prethe wiper lever. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to select
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
the desired wiper speed.
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the
lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles.

The delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the Washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate several
wipe cycles, then turn off.

122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mist Feature

With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever Rear Windshield Washer Operation
upward to the Mist position and release for a single Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
wiping cycle.
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as
described for the windshield wipers.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation

The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
not operating.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123

the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
may reduce rain sensor performance.
feature.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operaThe Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
sensitivity positions 4. If the operator desires less wiping
following conditions:
sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1.
Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
not using the system.
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
NOTE:
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h),
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.

124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will CLIMATE CONTROLS
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmisManual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If Equipped
sion gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Touchscreen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125

1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button

Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Faceplate

Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

The Manual Climate Controls consist of a series of rotary 3. Recirculation Button
dials with inner push buttons.
Press and release this button to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. 5. Rear Defrost Button
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
Defrost.
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis- the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
turbing the mode control selection.
defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up with the driver’s temperature,
when it is increased.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When
the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
will move up with the driver’s temperature, when it is
increased.

8. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
forced through the climate system. There are seven
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen

• Panel
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
9. Mode Control
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Push this button to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129

• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

11. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active,
the driver’s temperature will move down with the passenger’s temperature, when it is decreased.
12. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem10. Climate Control OFF Button
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
ON/OFF.
warmer temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is
active, the driver’s temperature will move up with the
passenger’s temperature, when it is increased.

130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Manual Temperature Control
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Rear Manual Climate Controls
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Mode Selection Button
Temperature Control buttons
Blower Control Buttons
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131

Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air
vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the
airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.

Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
temperature control up button to raise and down to
lower and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear
temperature settings are displayed in control head.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is
illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any
fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone —
If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.

Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
The Touchscreen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
3

Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
The Touchscreen
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 3. Recirculation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Press and release this button to change the system
1. MAX A/C Button
between recirculation mode and outside air mode. RecirPress and release to change the current setting, the culation can be used when outside conditions such as
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 4. AUTO Operation Button
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
will turn off.
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
2. A/C Button
this function will cause the system to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this Operation” for more information.
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch 5. Front Defrost Button
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135

with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.

136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.

10. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
automatically exit Sync.
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137

11. Blower Control

12. Modes

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

Push the button in the center of the knob to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.

138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Bi-Level Mode
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisAir comes from the instrument panel outlets
ture on the windshield.
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis- 13. Climate Control OFF Button
ter outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- ON/OFF.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperaamount of air is directed through the defrost ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
and side window demister outlets.
temperature settings.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
side window demister outlets. This setting adjust the passenger, and rear temperature setting at the
works best in cold or snowy conditions that same time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139

15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Climate Control Functions

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control Button
NOTE:
Provides the temperature setting for both the driver and
the passenger seating positions, which can be indepen- • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
dently set after selecting this button.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of

140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation conthe front of the radiator and through the condenser.
trol button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button a second
MAX A/C
time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- air into the vehicle.
mance.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
ON.
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
Recirculation
and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC dispossible.
play, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
regulate the amount of airflow.
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changmaintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
ing the front blower knob setting.
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically Manual Operation Override
maintain that comfort level.
This system offers a full complement of manual override
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- be turned off when the system is being used in the
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the manual mode.
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation

142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the • To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 8.4 radio,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ button on the touchscreen. To
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST
return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 5.0 radio,
mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield
press the “Done” button on the touchscreen.
and side glass.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) will appear. Control functions now operate
rear system.
Uconnect 5.0 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143

3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped

Uconnect 8.4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display

The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.

This display shows the temperature setting for the rear The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
seat occupants.

144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1
2
3
4
5

— Mode Control
— Temperature Control
— Blower Control
— Auto Button
— Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145

When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
The rear blower control head can be manually set to off, Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the ATC panel is
or any fixed blower speed, by pushing the blower control illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are igbuttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the nored.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When the Sync feature is active, the rear temperature is
synchronized to the driver’s temperature setting. If the
CAUTION!
rear temperature is changed, the Sync feature will deactivate.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in Rear Mode Control
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or Auto Mode
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occucausing damage to the blower motor.
pants.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Blower Control

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
the temperature buttons. The rear temperature settings
are displayed in the rear ATC panel.

146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Headliner Mode

Operating Tips

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to suggested control settings for various weather condidirect the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets tions.
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Summer Operation
Bi-Level Mode
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
floor outlets.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
Refer to “Fluids Aand Lubricants” in “Technical Data”
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headfor proper coolant selection.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Winter Operation
Floor Mode
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforAir comes from the floor outlets.
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids Aand

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147

Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter
months is not recommended, because it may cause
window fogging.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Vacation/Storage
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
slush, and snow.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in A/C Air Filter
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
of compressor damage when the system is started again. your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.

148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Operating Tips Chart

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149

WINDOWS
Power Windows
Driver Power Window Controls
3

You can control either the front or rear windows using
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.

Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped

150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active Front Passenger Power Door Controls
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

Front Passenger Power Door Controls
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151

Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Equipped
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
The front driver and front passenger controls may be
first detent and hold to close window manually.
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
control fully upward to the second detent, release, and NOTE: There is no anti-pinch protection when the winthe window will go up automatically.
dow is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
To stop the window from going all the way up during the clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
the first detent and release when you want the window to To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
stop.
steps after vehicle power is restored:
NOTE:

1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up for an
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
control again to close the window.

152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the control down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.

Sliding Door Power Window Control

NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof And Power Shade Switches

The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
1 — Sunroof Switch
the sun visors on the overhead console.
2 — Power Shade Switch

154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

(Continued)

Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155

Manual Mode

Closing Sunroof

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.

Express Mode

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.

Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Manual Mode
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
position.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof Wind Buffeting
opening to the Vent position.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode

Power Sun Shade — If Equipped

To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.

Opening Power Shade — Express Mode

Closing Power Shade — Express Mode

Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one
second and the shade will open automatically from any
position. The shade will open and stop automatically at
the half-open position. Push the shade switch rearward
again and release it within one second and the shade will
open automatically to the full-open position. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the shade switch will stop the
shade.

Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the shade will close automatically from any position.
If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close
fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the shade.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157

NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
completely.
Sunroof Maintenance
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the the glass panel.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Ignition OFF Operation
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
condition until the switch is pushed again.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Pinch Protect Feature
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of will cancel this feature.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mulitmedia” for further information.
tion if this occurs.

158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.

Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159

NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmission must be in park. Manual transmission vehicles
must have the electric park brake engaged.
Closing

Safety Latch Location

1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.

4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the 2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
hood.
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.

160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• RKE Key Fob

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161

vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a
valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate.
3

Unlock Liftgate Using An RKE Key Fob

The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry

162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”’ is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
Entry handle activation. If ‘Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the liftgate
will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Closing
To Close The Vehicle
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over
the closing effort.
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Power
Liftgate button (If Equipped), located in the upper left
trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.

Rear Power Liftgate Switch

To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163

WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped

• RKE Key Fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
• Hands-Free Liftgate – If Equipped
Using the above ways:
• when the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
• when the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
• when the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse

Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
to open or close the liftgate.
ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button

164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if
equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate handle.
NOTE: To open or close the liftgate, the Hands-Free
Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the door
handle.
Overhead Console Power Liftgate Power Switch
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Liftgate
Right Sliding Door
Side Door Lock Switch
Left Sliding Door

The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
Entry handle activation. If “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165

NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
3

Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.

Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone

To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a gentle straight forward and back kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general location

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information. The Handsdetect the motion.
Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during JackVehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
ing, Tire Changing, and Service.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow PackNOTE:
age, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power
Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the • The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear
receiver. Use the same gentile straight kicking motion
selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
(0 km/h).
under either activation zone to open/close the HandsFree Liftgate.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
meets sufficient resistance.
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is not
within 3 ft (1 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
kicks.
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167

• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or
closed manually.
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open or
close, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.

WARNING! (Continued)
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperatime, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
reset power liftgate functionality.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.

WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
(Continued)

NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.

168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area

NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169

Stow n’ VAC Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated
vacuum system. The system can clean up dry spills and
debris within the vehicle.
1. Make sure the vehicle is in Park (P) and the ignition is
set to Run/Accessory mode.
NOTE:
• The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power. At 10 minutes, the vacuum will shut
down and a low battery indication light will come on
one minute before shutdown.
• When the vehicle engine is running, the vacuum will
be capable of continuous operation.

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Open front vacuum storage compartments to access
the attachments if needed.

Power Buttons
Front Storage Compartments
1 — Retractable Vacuum Head/Hose Location
2 — Attachment Compartment Location

1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button

3. Pull out the vacuum hose and push the power button
located under the vacuum head. Begin to vacuum
(Dry use only).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171

Vacuum Attachments
• Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spots including
the latches located in the floor for the seats.
• Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris from
carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up
pet hair as well.

• Hose Extension — Use to add another 48 inches to the
end of the hose.

Vacuum System Access Panels
1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel

172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Remove And Empty The Debris Bin
To access and remove the debris bin, open the lower
access panel by pulling outward on the finger grip area of
the door. For debris bin removal, twist the (color) release
knob counterclockwise and pull the bin towards you.
Remove the filter and dump the debris in the proper
collection bin. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin
to remove any collected debris from the filter pleats.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE: The filter must be properly installed in the debris
bin before installing the debris bin in the vehicle.
Debris Bin Release Knob

Vacuum Troubleshooting
• If an object(s) become lodged in the hose, first try fully
extending the hose in a straight line while the vacuum
motor is on. If this does not work, then remove the
hose and try to shake it out.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173

• If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin Flammable / Explosive Liquids And Vapors
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection
Do not vacuum any flammable liquid
bin to remove any collected debris from the filter
spills or around explosive vapors.
pleats.
• If filter is in need of replacement, please see your
authorized dealer for a replacement filter.
Precautions While Using Vacuum System
Dry Vac Only
The Vacuum System is meant for dry
vacuuming only. Do Not use to pick
up spilled fluids, which can damage
the Vacuum System.

174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Flammable liquids and vapors can be ignited by
heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors from flammable liquids may form an explosive mixture with the air.
Vapors may travel to source of ignition and cause an
explosion. Any disregard of this warning could result
in injury or death.

Carbon Monoxide Gas
Do not leave the vehicle’s liftgate open
if the vehicle is running while the
vacuum is in use.

WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
Do not use with a missing or damage filter, as it will
allow debris to pass through the motor and possibly
damage it. Frequently check the filter to insure it is in
place and in good condition.

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175

WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

WARNING!
Do not pick up anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes. Vehicle
damage, personal injury, or death may result from
vacuuming up burning or smoking material.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the driver’s sunvisor,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.

176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Alarm is active.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
HomeLink Buttons

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 177

Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
transmitter button.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actifrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Revate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can channels.
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 179

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
Code)
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Reming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
steps.⬙
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non- several seconds of transmission.
Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.⬙

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 181

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches NOTE:
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programto program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
light in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.

182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink

Troubleshooting Tips

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:

Security

• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 183

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment

Release Handle

Front Door Storage

Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
To open the glove compartment pull out on the release storage.
handle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 185

Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of
the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the
access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted
once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to
the fully open position.

Front Door Storage

WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.

Drawer Access Button

186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Drawer Released

Drawer Fully Open

CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 187

Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped

Umbrella Holder

The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
models.
the front door entry scuff moldings.
3

Front Seatback Storage

Umbrella Holder

188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. To access the storage bin with front seats in the
rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked
The area below the load floor, located in front of the
position so the load floor can fold upwards towards
second row seats, is available for storage.
the seatback.
Second Row Floor Storage Bins

In Floor Storage Location

Lock Rod

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 189

NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.

2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.

Floor Latch

CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
(Continued)

190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.

WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 191

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha- lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
nism.

192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Coat Hooks

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.

An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.

Illuminated Mirror
Coat Hook

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 193

Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Sun screens are available for second and third row Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, top of the window.
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screens — If Equipped

Sun Screen Retracted
Sun Screen Extended

194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to NOTE:
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
base sill.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Power Outlets
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
knob and element must be used.
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
CAUTION!
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
battery and powered at all times.
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 195

The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel.

Front USB Charge Only Port
12 Volt Front Power Outlet

In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.

196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Outlet

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument 1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant 2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
“battery” powered all the time. See your local authorized 3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
dealer for details.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 197

WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)

Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of
seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other

198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
high-end video game consoles will exceed this power protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once
limit, as will most power tools.
the electrical device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the Power Inverter.

WARNING!

115 Volt Power Inverter

The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 199

Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper cigar
lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be
used.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.

CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
its initial position and is ready to be used.
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To
WARNING!
install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
off.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.

200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage

The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.

At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.

Full Open Position

Over Head Sunglass Door Latch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 201

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar

202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.

Thumb Screw

NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 203

Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
3

Removing Crossbars

CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Bending Pivot

Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.

204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Positioning Crossbars

Installing Crossbars

Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
completely.
deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can deployed in two
different positions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 205

Stowing The Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.

CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end.

Crossbar Pivot

206 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.

Crossbar To Side Rail
Stowing Crossbars

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 207

Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
thumb screws completely.
opposite side.

Tightening Crossbar

Stowed Crossbars

208 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.

CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.

(Continued)
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 209

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 䡵 TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . .214 䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . .230
䡵 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location and
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . .218
▫ EVIC/DID Display Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

▫ Green Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .261
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

3.5” EVIC Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

7” DID Instrument Cluster

214 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Cluster Descriptions
For 3.5” EVIC Cluster and 7” DID Cluster

•

The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
2. 3.5” EVIC / 7” DID Information Display
• The gauge can indicate a higher temperature when
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
shows the 3.5” EVIC OR 7” DID messages. Refer to
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of
“Display” located in “Getting To Know Your Instruthe normal operating range.
ment Panel” for further information.

1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).

3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

WARNING! (Continued)
gauge drops back into the normal range and is no
longer red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining And
Caring For Your Vehicle”.

DISPLAY
The vehicle can be equipped with a Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), or a Driver Information Display (DID), which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
The 3.5” EVIC and 7” DID feature a driver-interactive
display that is located in the center of the instrument
cluster.
The EVIC/DID Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — 7” DID

216 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio
• Navigation
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — 7” DID
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display (EVIC/DID) Control Buttons

• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

• DOWN Arrow Button

and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu Oil Change Reset
items.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
• RIGHT Arrow Button
flash in the instrument cluster display for approxiPush and release the RIGHT arrow button to
mately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to
access the information screens or submenu
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
screens of a main menu item.
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu • Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
screens of a main menu item.
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
• OK Button
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push

218 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proceSTART/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
dure.
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
• Continuous, dedicated telltale

Push Button Ignition

• Unique Display Splash Screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated
messages shown in the following table:
Setting
None – With
vehicle ignition ON
Max Vehicle
Speed

Start Up Fuel
Alert message
Early Low
Fuel Alert
Message
ParkSense

Cluster Display Message
“KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed
set to xx MPH/or km/h”

Setting
Blind Spot
Forward Collision Warning

Cluster Display Message
“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”

• “Max speed reached. KeySense in
use” supported by a chime
• “Approaching max speed xx
MPH/km” supported by a chime
“Range to empty xxx miles or km”

EVIC/DID Display Menu Items

“Fuel Low”

Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/
DID. Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.

“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”

NOTE: The EVIC/DID menu items display in the center
of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer

220 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Info

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.

Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/ Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
or RIGHT
arrow button to under “Safety” for further information.
DID. Push the LEFT
scroll through the following information submenus:
• Coolant Temperature
Tire Pressure
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is • Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the Only
ICON.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire • Oil Temperature
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the Displays the actual oil temperature.
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
• Oil Pressure
color than the other tire pressure value.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

Oil Life (Hold OK Button To Reset)

Driver Assist (7” DID)

The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at
all times, but the following conditions will need to be met
in order to reset Oil Life:
The vehicle’s engine must be off
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position

Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in
the DID cluster display. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy

• If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
or DOWN
arrow button
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to Push and release the UP
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
100%.
the EVIC/DID. The Fuel Economy Menu will display
• If the conditions are not met, a popup message will
the following:
display for 5 seconds, describing the required condi• Two sub menu pages that can be toggled between
tions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
and RIGHT
arrow buttons;
using the LEFT
• Battery Voltage
one with Current value displayed and one without
Displays the actual battery voltage.
the Current Value displayed (for DID only):
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)

222 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) Audio
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
particular engine requirements
until the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info

Navigation

When this feature is selected, the navigation system
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC/ route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaor RIGHT
arrow button to tion is reached.
DID. Push the LEFT
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Stored Messages
Trip information will display the following:
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
• Distance
until the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
• Average Fuel Economy
arrow button will
messages. Pushing the RIGHT
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/
DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
EVIC Screen Setup Options:
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (or L/100km, or km/L)

1. Upper Left
• None
• Compass (Default)
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
2. Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)

224 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio
• Menu Title (Default)
• Digital Speed
3. Current Gear
• On
• Off (Default)
4. Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
DID Screen Setup Options:
1. Lower Left
• None
• Compass (Default)
• Outside Temp.

• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
2. Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

• Audio
• Digital Speed
• Menu Title (Default)
3. Lower Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (Default)

5. Odometer
• Show
• Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
6. Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
Speed Warning — If Equipped (7” DID)
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu title is highlighted in
the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter
or DOWN
arrow
speed warning. Use the UP
button to turn the speed warning ON or OFF, then
push and release the OK button to confirm the selecor
tion. If the ON status is selected, use the UP
arrow button to set the desired speed, then
DOWN
press the OK button to set the speed for the speed
warning. A speed warning telltale will illuminate in

226 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set
speed, with a pop up message to inform the driver
that the speed warning has been set to the desired
speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible
chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the
speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow,
and a pop up warning message will pop up on the 7”
DID screen.

load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.

NOTE: Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
in use.
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped Information Display (DID).
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

NOTE:

• HVAC System

• The charging system is independent from load reduc- • 115V AC Power Inverter System
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
• Audio and Telematics System
charging system continuously.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
the following conditions:
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in ”Warning/ • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
Indicator Lights And Messages” located in ”Underloads are larger than the capability of charging system.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informaThe charging system is still functioning properly.
tion.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
by load reduction:
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
ing, frequent stopping).
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors

228 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- What to do when an electrical load reduction action
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long During a trip:
parking periods).
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
(weeks, months).
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
–
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
completely.
– Check the audio settings (volume)
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
After a trip:
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the • Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
consoles and similar devices.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving • Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
time and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the Trip B
message is still present during consecutive trips and
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
last reset.
not help to identify the cause.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
TRIP COMPUTER
last reset.
The Trip Computer is located in the Electronic Vehicle Elapsed Time
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
or DOWN
arrow Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
(DID). Push and release the UP
button until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
arrow button. Push and release time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
push the RIGHT
the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttons to highlight or START position.
one of the following functions if you want to reset it: To Reset A Trip Function
Trip A

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to
clear the resettable function being displayed.
last reset.

230 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
IMPORTANT: The warning/indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes- equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

Red Telltale Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

232 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

United States

Canada

What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.

234 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apNOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condiunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
the brake fluid level checked.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
NOTE: Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posidangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It tion.
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”

236 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to reach ⬙H.⬙ In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, whichever come first.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

238 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

240 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

NOTE: Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem- NOTE: If you continue operating the vehicle when the
perature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light

4
What It Means

Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

242 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light

What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.

Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light

What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

Yellow Telltale Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

244 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.

246 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and
is in a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

248 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”

Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.

250 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

NOTE: Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

NOTE: A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light

What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

252 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

NOTE: The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket
tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using
an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.

254 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Green Telltale Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green
Telltale
Light

What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
KeySense Indicator Light
The KeySense indicator is solid green when a KeySense key is detected upon startup of the
vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to a separate
specific set of settings associated with the KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys⬙ in “Getting to
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

256 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light

What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

258 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light

What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

White Telltale Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light

What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light

What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or
only the left or right lane marking has been detected. The indicator will turn green when
both lanes are detected and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

260 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but a speed has not been
set..

Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light

What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control speed has been set. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Warning
Light

What It Means
Speed Warning Light
When Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an
audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The
telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warning message will pop up on the EVIC/DID screen. Speed Warning can be turned on and off
in the EVIC/DID, for further information refer to “EVIC/DID Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emisYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard sions well within current government regulations.
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
transmission control systems. When these systems are also store diagnostic codes and other information to
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

262 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
“Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
4

SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .266

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . .321

▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . .278

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . .293

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .302

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . .302
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

266 SAFETY

ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • Brake pedal pulsations.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
WARNING!
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

267

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

268 SAFETY

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition Traction Control System (TCS)
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
repaired as soon as possible.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
Electronic Brake Control System
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited DifferBrake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elecential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differentronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
vehicle stability and control in various driving condienabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
tions.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then

SAFETY

269

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
WARNING! (Continued)
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroquickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure the safety of others.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
Brake System Warning Light
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
WARNING!
stay on for as long as four seconds.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in- is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
(Continued)

270 SAFETY

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.

This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.

NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as

SAFETY

271

road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Enor other vehicles.
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

This system enhances directional control and stability of The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lothe vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor- cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

272 SAFETY

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.

WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

SAFETY

273

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter
partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
Partial Off
on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.

274 SAFETY

WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acESC OFF Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

SAFETY

NOTE:

275

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds roll down the hill as normal.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver activate:
that caused the ESC activation.
• The feature must be enabled.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the • The vehicle must be stopped.
customer has elected to have the Electronic • Park brake must be off.
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

276 SAFETY

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.

WARNING! (Continued)
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA

WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.

WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA

277

• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
current setting, proceed as follows:
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.

278 SAFETY

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.

SAFETY

279

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:

Rear Detection Zones

• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false

280 SAFETY

detections. The BSM warning light may even remain
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

Sensor Location

If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are
met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the

SAFETY

281

blockage. After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system:
• Cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.
• Ensure that the system detects a blind spot target on
each side while driving above 6 mph (10 km/h).
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Warning Light Location
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
information.
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.

282 SAFETY

Entering From The Side

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring

SAFETY

283

Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
5

Overtaking/Approaching

284 SAFETY

Overtaking/Passing

Stationary Objects

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasion- adjacent lanes.
ally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require service.

SAFETY

285

WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

286 SAFETY

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
the host vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side
the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from
the opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones

WARNING!

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.

287

alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Modes Of Operation
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detimedia” for further information.
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM muted.
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is

288 SAFETY

present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio General Information
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
RCP state always requests the chime.
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Blind Spot Alert Off
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
systems.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:

2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op• The BSM system will store the current operating mode
eration of the device.
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
used.
other than an authorized service facility could void
• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the authorization to use this equipment.
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to
“Keysense Features⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

SAFETY

289

and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
system will compensate and provide additional brake
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
force as required.
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maxiavoid or mitigate the potential collision.
mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with MitigaNOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
release the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped

If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle

290 SAFETY

NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.

FCW Message

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
message will be deactivated.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.

SAFETY

WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

291

Changing the status of the system is only possible with
the vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE:
• The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

• FCW can work in conjunction with the Keysense
function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “Keysense
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
Features⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
The forward collision menu setting is located in the
further information
Uconnect settings.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On,” this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
vehicle in front of you.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further inforChanging the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys- mation.
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision

292 SAFETY

The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.

Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.

NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
driver after ignition shut down.
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
higher rate of speed.
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

SAFETY

293

FCW Limited Warning

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Service FCW Warning
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for information on how to
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have there should be no adjustment for this increased presthe system checked by an authorized dealer.
sure.

294 SAFETY

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.

system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
The system will automatically update and the “Tire value.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.

SAFETY

CAUTION!

295

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
(Continued)

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

296 SAFETY

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure The TPMS consists of the following components:
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
• Receiver Module
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
ing Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
the tire.
Base System

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
and to maintain the proper pressure.
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.

SAFETY

297

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni- when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
toring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
TPMS sensors.
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
that affects radio wave signals.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
this information.
housings.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence Vehicles With Compact Spare
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

298 SAFETY

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.

off, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound readings to the receiver module.
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and and to maintain the proper pressure.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn

SAFETY

299

The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
5

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically

300 SAFETY

update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.

longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
that affects radio wave signals.
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
display a ⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of
housings.
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
received.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
Service TPMS Warning

SAFETY

301

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniEVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” mestor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
sage for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
place of the pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC/DID will still
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate
the EVIC/DID will display a new pressure value
to XX⬙ message.
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Vehicles With Compact Spare

302 SAFETY

General Information

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and • Seat Belt Systems
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
following two conditions:
• Child Restraints
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
Important Safety Precautions
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera- Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
tion.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
possible.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
Some of the most important safety features in your
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
vehicle are the restraint systems:
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

SAFETY

move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

303

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween occupants and the door and occupants could
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
be injured.
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
them or under their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
WARNING!
properly.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
shoulder belts properly.
(Continued)

304 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
Seat Belt Systems
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver position.
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
Initial Indication
happen far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermitcan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN

SAFETY

position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

305

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- belts are buckled again.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence

306 SAFETY

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)

SAFETY

307

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.

(Continued)
(Continued)

308 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.

(Continued)

SAFETY

309

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

310 SAFETY

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

SAFETY

311

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
shoulder belt.
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
up or down to the position that serves you best.
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.

312 SAFETY

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Third Row Center Belt Operating Instructions
The third row center seat belt features a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
Adjustable Anchorage
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will stored out of the way in the headliner for added conveprefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, nience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.

SAFETY

313

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
the seat.
behind the third row seat.

Mini-Latch Plate
Mini-Latch Stowage

314 SAFETY

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
restraint.
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”

Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected
Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle

SAFETY

315

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle

1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

316 SAFETY

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.

WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the minibuckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to Seat Belt Extender
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the minilatch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
position.
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

SAFETY

317

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.

318 SAFETY

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
worn snugly and positioned properly.
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

SAFETY

319

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.

8 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats

7 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats

• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

320 SAFETY

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be
the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
WARNING!
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
(Continued)

SAFETY

321

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
locking mode.
Air Bag System Components

WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors

322 SAFETY

• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
Locations
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
the air bag covers.

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag

SAFETY

WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

323

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

324 SAFETY

This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial

SAFETY

325

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Passenger Seat
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Adhave deployed.
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occuSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
away from an inflating air bag.
following:
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

326 SAFETY

• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
located in the front passenger seat
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
• Air Bag Warning Light
the OCS estimates that:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pascated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
senger, including a child; or
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas- • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commuchild restraint; or
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.

SAFETY

Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult

Unoccupied seat

Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment

327

including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the

328 SAFETY

ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor

Seated Properly

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)

• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
seatback in an upright position
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.

SAFETY

329

Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
seated weight on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instruThe front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
ment panel).
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
to face the rear of the vehicle.
that it detects.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
position.
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
improperly.
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
and center console.
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployfront passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
seat.

330 SAFETY

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

SAFETY

331

Not Seated Properly

332 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

Not Seated Properly

WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)

signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.

333

Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

in the instrument panel The following requirements must be strictly followed:
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
components in any way.
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
service immediately.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS comaftermarket seat cover or cushion.
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.

334 SAFETY

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.

WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).

Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.

WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air

SAFETY

335

Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

336 SAFETY

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
“AIRBAG.”
body structure.

SAFETY

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

337

WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.

338 SAFETY

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

WARNING!

(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.

339

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side

340 SAFETY

Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of
the vehicle.

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
immediately after deployment.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inor all of the following may occur:
structions for cleaning.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricbags will not be in place to protect you.
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
If A Deployment Occurs

SAFETY

WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.

341

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
authorized dealer immediately.
Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition

342 SAFETY

OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malstraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
with air bag system electrical components.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

SAFETY

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.

343

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecBag Warning Light will illuminate on the intion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
system immediately.
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.

344 SAFETY

If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights and
Messages” in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

SAFETY

345

These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

346 SAFETY

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

SAFETY

347

There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
call 1-866-732-8243.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.

348 SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and
Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large
for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle

SAFETY

Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.

349

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

350 SAFETY

WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.

Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

SAFETY

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)

351

WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?

352 SAFETY

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

SAFETY

353

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

354 SAFETY

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

SAFETY

355

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

8 Passenger With Stow N Go

•
7 Passenger With Stow N Go

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

356 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.

SAFETY

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Frequently Asked Questions
No

Yes

357

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.

358 SAFETY

Can the head restraints be removed?

Frequently Asked Questions
Yes

NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed
in front of it.

The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and fixed quad seats and in
the center seat (if equipped), are
removable. 2nd row outboard stow
’n go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head
restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.

WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.

SAFETY

359

Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)

360 SAFETY

right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat
for either the center or left outboard seating position. All
tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near
the floor.

LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages
Shown)

Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located behind all second row seating positions. The third
row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the

Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)

SAFETY

361

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1). AnCenter Seat LATCH Positions
chorages C and D are used for the center seating position If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
(2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchor- do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
ages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your
vehicle.

362 SAFETY

center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or To install a LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoposition.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
WARNING!
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
to allow more room for the child seat.
here.

SAFETY

363

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.

364 SAFETY

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.

SAFETY

365

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle

8 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
7 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

366 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Question About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
Weight limit of the
Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Child Restraint
the seat belt to install a forward facing
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
child restraint, up to the recommended
forward facing child restraint?
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat?
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and
fixed quad seats, and in the center seat (if
equipped) are removable. 2nd row stow ’n
go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable
in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.

SAFETY

367

Frequently Asked Questions
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
the seat belt against the belt path of the
position with an ALR retractor.
child restraint?
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in- Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
in front of it.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
WARNING!
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
more room for the child seat.
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

368 SAFETY

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
against the child seat.
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
attach a tether anchor.
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
in any direction.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.

SAFETY

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:

WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

369

Tether Anchorage Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.

370 SAFETY

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SAFETY

371

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row
Anchorage Shown)

Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in
the third row may be used by either the left outboard or
the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint
to the tether anchorage at a time.

372 SAFETY

To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage
for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard
(right) side of the head restraint support posts, as
shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Center Tether Strap Attachment – 3rd row

SAFETY

373

Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
Outboard Tether Strap Attachments – 3rd Row

WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat
in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one
child restraint at a time.

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

374 SAFETY

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

375

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

376 SAFETY

have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
WARNING!
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious perservice the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
sonal injury.
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Defroster
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
secured to prevent them from moving and interferfeel the air directed against the windshield. See your
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopervehicle.
able.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
Floor Mat Safety Information
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
(Continued)

SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

377

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.

378 SAFETY

Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .388
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . .385
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .386

▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .396
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .396
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION . . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .405

▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .419

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .424

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .411
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .412
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .425
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .428
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .445
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .460
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .461
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .487

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Vehicle Loading Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

䡵 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

. .521
. .521
. .522
. .523
. .523
. .524

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
(Continued)

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will
display “ACC”),
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
will display “ON/RUN”),
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
the engine starting, push the button again.
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Drivdisplay “OFF”).
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

Extended Park Starting

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it decrease as the engine warms up.
when the engine starts.
If Engine Fails To Start
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed quicker starts in cold weather.
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
passenger’s side headlamp.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures NOTE:
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow the
steps below to properly use the engine block heater:
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the passenger’s side headlamp).
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your
Vehicle.”

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- not interpreted as a problem.
mental and should be avoided.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

PARKING BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more convenient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;

6
Electric Park Brake Switch

To apply the park brake manually, push the switch
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea- the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
ture in the customer programmable features section of Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warnthe Uconnect Settings.
ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
The park brake switch is located in the instrument panel. the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the ACC or RUN position.

The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is
buckled.

To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmispedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is enBRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The park brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)

(Continued)

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.

CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
push on the electric park brake switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
position and back to ON again.
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection Brake Service Mode
through the “Customer Programmable Features” section
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
of the “Uconnect Settings”.
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
SafeHold
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if service.
Auto Park Brake

the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system,
this can only be done after retracting the Electric Park
Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
done easily by entering the “Brake Service” through the
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the “Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle. This menu based
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

system will guide you through the steps necessary to • Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
WARNING!
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be

(Continued)

WARNING!

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
shifting out of PARK.
moving at low speeds.
Ignition Park Interlock
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or the
Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on the gear
selector and then rotate it, to access the L position. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.

NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear
only in very specific driving situations and conditions.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the Gear Ranges
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting between these gears.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.

Transmission Gear Selector

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)

(Continued)

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operatvehicle and have a collision.
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch LOW (L)
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam- Use this range for engine braking when descending very
age due to overheating.
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downIf the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis- shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn- position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the fully clockwise.
transmission may operate differently until the transmis- Transmission Limp Home Mode
sion cools down.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
be modified depending on engine and transmission result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumiconverter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). aging the transmission.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomcan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps:
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, dealer service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Torque Converter Clutch
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
turns OFF.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
5. Restart the engine.
different feeling or response during normal operation in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
operation.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system is designed to address exhaust
and engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator,
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at
idle and during drive.

POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It
is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.

SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate

Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Speed Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator
Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when
not in use.

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control ON.

To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed U.S. Speed (mph)
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
continue to increase until the button is released, then
speed.
the new set speed will be established.

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

Metric Speed (km/h)

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed

Metric Speed (km/h)

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
the new set speed will be established.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

To Accelerate For Passing

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the EQUIPPED
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
To Resume Speed
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above Speed Control function performs differently. Please
20 mph (32 km/h).
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
To Deactivate

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition NOTE:
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the buttons. The two control modes function differently.
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset Always confirm which mode is selected.
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.

You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.

(Continued)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL

When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
6

• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
To Activate/Deactivate
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
(Continued)

NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
in the EVIC/DID.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle To Turn Off
speed will only be determined by the position of the The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
accelerator pedal.
memory if:
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle To Increase Speed
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Setcontinue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
in the EVIC/DID.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
in the EVIC/DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rewill automatically slow the vehicle.
flected in the EVIC/DID.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rehill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
flected in the EVIC/DID.
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
NOTE:
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to main• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
of the vehicle.
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Metric Speed (km/h)

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
6
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
Brake Alert
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the EVIC/DID is a warnbraking capacity.
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
When driving with ACC engaged and following a veparking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
be cancelled.
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
passing on the left hand side.
will be cancelled.
ACC Operation At Stop
Overtake Aid

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.

WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:

The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the ACC SET
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
on ACC system status.
instrument cluster.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
• System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Driver Override
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

• ACC Proximity Warning

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
Control Ready.”
after five seconds of no ACC display activity

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning

vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
vehicle behind the lower grille.
the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Racould cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and dar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system permalfunction.
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibilWhen the condition that deactivated the system is no ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive system may also become temporarily blinded due to
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield,
simply reactivating it.
driving directly into the sun and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
When the condition that created limited functionality is drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempono longer present, the system will return to full function- rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
ality.
see your authorized dealer.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

Narrow Vehicles

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

General Information

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or

SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set.
This light will turn on when the system is turned on via
the On/Off control. It turns green when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Setcontinue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
in the EVIC/DID display.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in the EVIC/DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the EVIC/DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
To Resume Speed
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reTo resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h).
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
possible collision with an obstacle.
memory if:
NOTE:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
• The ignition is turned off.
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
automatic brakes are being applied.
pushed.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
To Turn Off

faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. • The automatic braking function may not provide
during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

• The automatic braking function may not be applied • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
substitute the driver.
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limi• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state tations of this system and recommendations.
for the automatic braking function through ignition
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
cycles.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the changed to the ON/RUN position.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
NOTE:
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s opervehicle.
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Display

ParkSense Visual Alert

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

6
Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

6
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120 cm) (120-100 cm)

Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs —
Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime

Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
None

79-59 in
(200-150 cm)

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

None

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

3rd
Flashing
None

Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes

Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

Slow
(for rear
center only)

2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast

Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Continuous

None

6th Solid

None
None

Radio
Volume
Reduced

Yes

Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.

6
ParkSense Switch

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
Instrument Panel”” for further information. When the
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENswitch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REwill be ON.
QUIRED⬙ message for five seconds while the vehicle is in
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF operate and will read “OFF” over the arcs.
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙KeyIf “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙ mesSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
sage.
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
Cleaning The ParkSense System
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damwill display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
age the sensors.
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
NOTE:
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
properly.
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.

CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.

WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The automatic braking function may not provide NOTE:
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
vehicle.
conditions, and brake capability.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
substitute the driver.
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides. • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
vehicle’s movements.
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
cycles.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
ParkSense Sensors
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
direction, depending on the location, type and orientabumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tion of the obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSense Visual Alert
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer tion of the obstacle.
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Rear Park Assist
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ing the system status.
ParkSense Display

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

6
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

6
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120 cm) (120-100 cm)

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

None

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

3rd
Flashing
None

Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes

Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast

Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs —
Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime

Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
None

79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
None

None

6th Solid

None
None

Radio
Volume
Reduced

Yes

Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Continuous

Yes

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
Front Park Assist
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

No Tone/Solid Arc

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

No Tone/Flashing Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

6
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced

Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No

WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast

Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “MulParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
timedia” for further information.
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
brake pedal is applied.
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.

6
ParkSense Switch

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILswitch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILwill be ON.
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNNOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙Key- displayed with ⬙OFF⬙ at either the front or rear sensor
Sense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙ mes- location depending on where the fault is detected. The
sage.
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENdetected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will SORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REactuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will QUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer
to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damIf ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ age the sensors.
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENParkSense System Usage Precautions
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make NOTE:
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
operating properly.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibraan authorized dealer.
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
authorized dealer.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five seconds while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
radio when it is sounding a tone.
the open position.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This may cause the automatic brakcovered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ing application to be delayed.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
CAUTION!
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
fascia/bumper.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parktouches the steering wheel after being instructed to
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sysproviding audible/visual instructions, and controlling
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
manually complete the parking maneuver.
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver • New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
side or passenger side).
miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
NOTE:
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.

6
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch

To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off • The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
automatically for any of the following conditions:
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
• The parking maneuver is completed.
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
searching for a parking space.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering •
guidance into the parking space.
•
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
•
switch.
•
• The Driver’s door is opened.
•
• The liftgate is opened.
•
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.

The gear position is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
The Driver’s door is closed.
The liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the DID will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.

Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting.
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park NOTE:
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
present.
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
parking space for the maneuver).
sequence.

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

6
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From

Wheel
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

When the driver places the gear selector into the RE- The system will then instruct the driver to check their
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to surroundings and move backward.
wait for steering to complete.

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

NOTE:

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
ver.
reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle.

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — STOP

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.

When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

The system will then instruct the driver to check their check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
surroundings and move backward.
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.

6
Active ParkSense Searching Display

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
parking space for the maneuver).
NOTE:

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected When an available parking space has been found, and the
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
parking sequence.
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

6
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

NOTE:

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

Check Surroundings — STOP

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — STOP

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.

6
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.

Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be prounintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
vided.
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
does not return their hands to the wheel.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane
Sense On” message is shown in the DID.

Lane Sense On Message
LaneSense Button

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 DID Screen
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

6
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Changing LaneSense Status

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity EQUIPPED
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
in “Multimedia” for further information.
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cauNOTE:
tion note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
above the rear license plate.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settraction control system, electronic stability control,
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
forward collision warning, etc.).

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen
button personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera projected backup path based on the steering wheel
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and position.
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera the vehicle.
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
ParkView Camera Location

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED

view is selected through the ⬙on screen soft buttons⬙. The
top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note; “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is
comprised of 4 sequential cameras located in the front
grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE: The Surround View Camera System has programmable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
camera view & top view is the default view of the system.
Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle when- When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the
is switched to the OFF position.
side view mirrors and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the surround view camera mode is Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
exited and the last known screen appears again. There is the vehicle.
a touch screen button (X) to disable the display of the
camera image.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

Modes of Operation
Additional camera modes can be selected when the
vehicle is in any gear and the surround view camera
system is activated by pressing the soft key located in the
“Controls” screen or the “Apps” screen in the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with
Rear View and Front View in a split view display. There
is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow
ParkSense Arcs
to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming
NOTE:
object.
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Open Front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top view of the vehicle with optional active guide lines for the projected path when enabled.

Front View
The Front view will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top view of
the vehicle.

Front Cross Path View
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is
selected.

Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is
selected.

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following conditions:
• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
• The vehicle is out of REVERSE for greater than 10
seconds.
• Shift the vehicle into PARK from a different gear.
• Press the “X” button if the vehicle is in any gear.
NOTE:
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.

• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
your nearest authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in
your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.

CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

CAUTION! (Continued)
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o’clock position) and release to open.

Fuel Filler Cap Release

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
filler nozzle.
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
6. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
(3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the
ice build up.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Inflation Pressure

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
cle’s GVWR.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Tire Size

added.

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents Loading
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerlisted.
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
CAUTION! (Continued)
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh- parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted your vehicle.
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier TRAILER TOWING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed In this section you will find safety tips and information
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
the brakes operate.

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
(Continued)

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Common Towing Definitions

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Frontal Area
Tongue Weight (TW)

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
Trailer Sway Control
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and trailers.
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Max. Tongue
Combined
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer
Weight
Weight Rating)
Weight)
3.6L/Automatic
Yes
8,600 lbs
40 sq ft
3,600 lbs
360 lbs (163 kg)
(3 900 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1 632 kg)*
No
6,500 lbs
40 sq ft
1500 lbs
149 lbs (67 kg)
(2 948 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(680 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Engine/
Transmission

Trailer Tow
Package

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further
information.

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicle Loading Chart

EXAMPLE:

Follow these steps to determine the total weight the • GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
vehicle can carry.
• CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg)
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
• Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
• Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle
- 4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs (682 kg)
full fluids NO Occupants).
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
2. Determine occupant count.
• For calculation purposes, average weight of an occu- • 1505 lbs (682 kg) – 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x 150 lbs [68 kg])
– 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs
pant is 150 lb (68 kg).
(247 kg) of cargo in vehicle

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants

2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg

4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg)

7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg)

Max Cargo No
Trailer

1205 lbs (546 kg)

Tongue Load,
Max Trailer

1205 lbs
(546 kg) –
360 lbs (136 kg)
= 845 lbs
(383 kg)

Max Cargo
With Max
Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load

845 lbs (383 kg)

955 lbs (433 kg)

955 lbs (433 kg)
– 360 lbs
(136 kg) =
545 lbs (247 kg)

545 lbs (247 kg)

455 lbs (206 kg)

455 lbs (206 kg)
– 360 lbs
(163 kg) =
95 lbs (43 kg)

95 lbs (43 kg)

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
rear axles.
• GAWR are found on sticker in Drier Side Door Jam.

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

Trailer And Tongue Weight

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
your bumper or trailer hitch.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper mainteTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- nance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
train components, the following guidelines are recom- GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended.
Towing Requirements

WARNING!

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Maintaining

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:

(Continued)

1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
“Tires” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle”
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintaina hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
ing And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

CAUTION!

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

6
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips

Cooling System

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, To reduce potential for engine and transmission overand backing up the trailer in an area located away from heating, take the following actions:
heavy traffic.
City Driving
Automatic Transmission
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on steep Highway Driving
downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

Air Conditioning

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

Turn off temporarily.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer

Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL

All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK

• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park • If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
NOTE:

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Recreational Towing — All Models

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels 9. Release the parking brake.
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer 10. Turn the ignition OFF.
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, 11. Release the brake pedal.
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

Driving On Slippery Surfaces

Traction
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
launches in adverse conditions.
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs be observed:
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
the front (driving) wheels.
slushy.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .529

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537

▫ Jack And Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537

▫ Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562

䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547

▫ Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped . . . . .571

▫ Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548

▫ Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574

▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548

528 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Return Inflatable Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .582 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . .599
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .600

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 529

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the EQUIPPED
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
lower center area of the instrument panel.
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windPush the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direca counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disbe used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
view viewing.
other motorists.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
On or Off using the Mirror Dimming Button on the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
mirror.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.

530 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
1 — 9-1-1 Button
2 — Mirror Dimming Button
3 — ASSIST Button

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.

• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 531

ASSIST Call

9-1-1 Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
to any one of the following support centers:
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con- system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile 2. The LED light located between the Power and 9-1-1
features.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.

532 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 NOTE:
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
by the subscriber.
operator:
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
• The vehicle brand.
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
additional help is needed.
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to reWARNING!
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with imporand Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 533

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.

(Continued)

534 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.

WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• The Device Screen will display the following message beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
dealer.”
limited to, the following factors:
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de- • The ignition is in OFF position.
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 535

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global NOTE:
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
structed.
by the subscriber.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac• Weather conditions.
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.

536 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 537

BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Center & Rear Dome Lamp
Center & Rear Reading Lamps
Front Door Courtesy Lamp
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster Lamps
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps

LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

Bulb Number
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
6501966

Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)

538 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
Halogen Headlamp

Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Side Marker Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
LED Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp

Bulb Number
Low Beam - D3S
High Beam - 9005LL
Reflector Low Beam - H11LL
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
All High Beams - 9005LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped)
PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped)
W3W
PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
W21/5WLL

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 539

Lamps
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp

Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

Bulb Number
Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb
Equipped); LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped); LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
W21W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
(Continued)

540 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Cap

3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 541

7
Headlamp Bulb Socket

Headlamp Bulb

4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

542 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 543

2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
lamp assembly.
and carefully peel back liner for access.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps

Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners

Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal

3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.

544 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully
peel back liner for access.
2. Reach through the front fascia to fog lamp housing to
access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
Front Fog Lamp Socket
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacefront fog lamp housing.
ment bulb.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 545

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now
visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.

5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
1. Raise the liftgate.
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install 2. Remove two torx head screws on bodyside lamp using
a T30 screwdriver.
fasteners.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail
Lamps (If Bulb Equipped)
1. Raise the liftgate.

3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb
socket on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counterclockwise.

4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
the bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim.

546 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
dealer for replacement.
FUSES

WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 547

General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
7
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

548 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment and under the instrument panel.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed
on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center

Cavity
F06
F07
F08
F09

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–

Blade Fuse
–
25 Amp Clear
–
25 Amp Clear

Description
Not Used
Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
Not Used
Amplifier/ANC

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 549

Cavity
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green

Blade Fuse
–
–
5 Amp Tan
–
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–

F19

25 Amp Clear

–

F20
F21

–
25 Amp Clear

10 Amp Red
–

Description
Not Used
Not Used
Battery Sensor (IBS)
Not Used
ECM
Power Locks
ECM
Starter
CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lights #1)
2nd Row Folding Seats
Solenoid LT
A/C Compressor Clutch
2nd Row Folding Seat
Solenoid RT

550 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity
F22
F23
F24
F25B

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–

Blade Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

F26

40 Amp Green

–

F27
F28

25 Amp Clear
–

–
10 Amp Red

F29
F30

–
–

–
15 Amp Blue

F31

–

Description
Not Used
Not used
RR Wiper
LT RR Door/RT RR Release Module/Active Grill
Shutter/Power Mirror
Front HVAC Blower Motor
RR Slide Door Module
Diagnostic Port/ USB
Port/ AUX Port/ Video
USB Port
Not Used
Media Hub 1, 2/ Power
Lumbar
Not Used

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 551

Cavity
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37

Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
–
40 Amp Green

Blade Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–

F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
F44

60 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
30 Amp Pink

–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–

Description
ECM
Power Liftgate Module
RR Door Node
Sunroof Control Module
Not Used
CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting #2)
Vacuum Cleaner
HVAC Blower Motor
Not Used
Not Used
Folding Seat Module
Fuel Pump Motor
CBC Feed #1 (Interior
Lights)

552 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55

Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
40 Amp Green
–

Blade Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue

Description
Power Inverter
Driver Door Module
Passenger Door Module
Not Used
RR Sliding Door Module
RR Door Module
Front Wiper
Brake Vacuum Pump
Not Used
ESP-ECU And Valves
Keyless Ignition System/
DVD/Voice Recognition
Module

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 553

Cavity
F56

Cartridge Fuse
–

Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red

F57
F58
F59

–
–
30 Amp Pink

–
–
–

F60
F61

–
–

20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow

F62
F63

–
–

–
20 Amp Yellow

F64
F65

–
–

15 Amp Blue
–

Description
Front and Rear HVAC
Control Module/ESP/
ESC
Not Used
Not Used
7 Way Connector Receptacle — If Equipped
Rear Cargo APO
Trailer Tow Right Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
Not Used
Trailer Tow Left Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
RT HID Headlamp
Not Used

554 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity
F66

Cartridge Fuse
–

Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue

F67

–

10 Amp Red

F68
F69
F70
F71
F72

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

F73
F74

30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue

–
–

Description
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Horn
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
Rear Defroster (EBL)
Trailer Tow Backup

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 555

Cavity
F75

Cartridge Fuse
–

Blade Fuse
5 Amp Tan

F76

–

20 Amp Yellow

F77

–

10 Amp Red

F78

–

15 Amp Blue

F79

–

10 Amp Red

F80

–

Description
Overhead Console / RR
ISC
Uconnect/DCSD/
Telematics
RR Entertainment Screen
1 And 2/ Media Screen 1
And 2/ 3rd Row Row
USB Charge Only/ 2nd
Row YSB Charge Only/
Sunroof/Rainsensor/
CRVMM/
Instrument Cluster/EShifter
ICS/Front And Rear
HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB
Not Used

556 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity
F81
F82
F83

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Blue

Blade Fuse
–
–
–

F84
F85
F86
F87
F88
F89
F90
F91

40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
20 Amp Yellow

F92
F93

–
–

Description
Not Used
Not Used
TT Park Lights — If
Equipped
ESP Motor Pump
Cigar Lighter
Not Used
Not Used
Front Heated Seats
Rear Heated Seats
Not Used
Front Ventilated Seats/
Heated Steering Wheel
Not Used
Not Used

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 557

Cavity
F94
F95
F96

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–

Blade Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

F97

–

10 Amp Red

F98
F99

–
30 Amp Pink

15 Amp Blue
–

F100

–

10 Amp Red

Description
Not Used
USB Charge Only Port
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Left HID Headlamp
Electrical Brake Module/
Trailer Tow — If
Equipped
AHLM/Rear Camera/
LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor

558 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument
panel.
Cavity
F13
F32
F36
F37
F38
F43
F48
F49
F51

Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red

F53
F89

7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan

Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module / Siren
Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
All Doors Lock/Unlock
Washer Pump Front
Horns
Lumbar Support
Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
Trunk Lamp

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 559

Cavity
F91
F92
F93

Blade Fuse
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)

Description
Fog Lamp Front Left
Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.

560 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Jack And Spare Tire Location

Equipment Removal

The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor 1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
(if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped)are stowed
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service
behind a access panel on left hand side of the vehicle.
Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding
the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the
storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.

Jacking Equipment Location

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 561

3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw counterclockwise to collapse from storage area that is located
behind the tire.

7
Jacking Equipment
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Inflatable Spare Tire
Tire Service Kit
Wrench
Fuel Filler Funnel

Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack

562 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
ing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
slippery areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
WARNING!
Preparations For Jacking

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 563

WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK.
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire” section of “Tires” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for information about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation.

564 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Extending The Wrench

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.

Jack Locations

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 565

7
Front Jack Location

Front Jack Engaged

566 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Rear Jacking Location

Rear Jack Engaged

WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 567

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.

3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until 6. Install the inflatable spare on the car, located in the
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
rear cargo area of the vehicle.
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
(Continued)

568 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING!

damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the car on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the
car. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts
with wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity to “torque”
the lug nuts.

Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire

8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Refer to “Portable Air Compressor” in this section for usage procedure if

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 569

equipped. Refer to “Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire” 11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
in this section for usage procedure if equipped
9. Lower the car once the inflatable Spare has reached its
pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed
from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

570 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and
place the access panel back. The stud of the storage
are must be threaded through the lower part of the
jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it
in place.
NOTE: Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.

Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 571

Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in
the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).

7
Portable Air Compressor
1
2
3
4
5

— Power Plug
— Deflation Button
— Pressure Gauge
— Power Button
— Air Hose

572 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage
location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions within this section.

3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near
the ground, and then screw the air
hose of the Portable Air compressor
to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect
it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 573

5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air Compressor.

6. Switch the power button ON.

7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle
with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this
manual.

574 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air Compressor and place it on the center of
the steering wheel.

10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.

WARNING!
• Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
• Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Use the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment
of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi
(4.2 Bar).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 575

Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air mode operation only.

Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Mode Select Knob
Sealant/Air Hose
Hose Accessories
Sealant Bottle
Power Plug
Power Switch
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge

Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire.

576 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.

WARNING!
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 577

WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the

kit when running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location.
2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Remove the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting in at the
end of the Sealant/Air Hose clockwise onto the valve stem.

578 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.

7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air
Mode position.

4. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the NOTE: Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant. Refer
deflated tire.
to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for repairing tires.
5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine ON.
6. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

8. Switch the power button ON.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 579

9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.

11. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Tire Service Kit
and place it on the center of the
steering wheel.

12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and
secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.

10. After the tire reaches the recomRoad Tire Installation
mended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
the Jack Instructions section in this
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
manual.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install

580 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut

4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud

5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 581

leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
handle counterclockwise.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
seated against the wheel.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
lug nuts.
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.

582 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a 6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor
if equipped and tighten the strap.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
7. Install access panel door.
Return Inflatable Spare Tire
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
1. Return the Jack.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Inflator Kit or can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation but- screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
ton to do this step. Refer to “Tire Inflator Kit” or Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
“Portable Air Compressor” if equipped in this section approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temfor additional information. The inflatable spare tire porary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
will return to its original shape.
(90 km/h).
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
Tire Service Kit Storage
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed. The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored
in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
panel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 583

Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Mode Select Knob
Sealant/Air Hose
Hose Accessories
Sealant Bottle
Power Plug
Power Switch
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge

584 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Selecting Sealant Mode

Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.

Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
tire.
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 585

on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
section.
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
need to be replaced after each use. Always replace
Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the
these components immediately at your original equipAir Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
ment vehicle dealer.
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
(Continued)

586 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
(Continued)

(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 587

WARNING! (Continued)
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.

running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.

2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and

588 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Remove the cap from the valve Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
stem and then screw the fitting at
1. Always start the engine before
the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
valve stem.

4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.

2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
the Sealant Mode position.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 589

3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through the
Sealant Hose and into the tire.

Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and
not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the
Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
tire.
the Tire Service Kit.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
Call for assistance.
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem.

590 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:

2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading
information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check
the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge.

1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
tire pressure when the Sealant pressure within 15 minutes:
Bottle is empty.
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 591

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place
sticker on the steering wheel.

1. Push the Power Button to turn off
the Tire Service Kit.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”

592 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Drive Vehicle:

After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit
Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).

WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Dealer.

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
3.

Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 593

4. Uncoil the power plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.

6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.

5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fit- 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
ting at the end of hose onto the
Gauge.
valve stem.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

594 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
service center.
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire
to the cold tire inflation pressure 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
found on the tire and loading inforwheel after the tire has been repaired.
mation label located in the driver6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as
side door opening.
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle ReplaceNOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflament”.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomNOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, using the Tire Service Kit.
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Unwrap the power cord.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
2. Unwrap the hose.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

3. Remove the bottle cover.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 595

4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.

NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation follow these steps reverse order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

596 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.

Negative Remote Battery Post

Positive Remote Battery Post

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 597

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

598 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative post near the windshield cowl
(exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).

WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 599

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is
discharged battery.
needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle to fill the vehicle.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

600 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to “Refuelling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating ”
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
in this manual.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
from the engine cooling system.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
CAUTION!
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
• On the highways — slow down.
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
an impending overheat condition:
service.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 601

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.

602 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis- 2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
a Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the
lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to
a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it
will go, then release it. The transmission should now
be in NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
NOTE: When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the
access cover cannot be re-installed.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Access Cover

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in
the driver’s seat.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 603

NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
1. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
2. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
original position.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
4. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and rewheels or racing the engine.
install the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
re-installed, repeat steps 1 through 3.
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.

604 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 605

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed

Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL

ALL MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent NOTE:
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipdisabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
features in the Uconnect Settings.
vehicles under tow must be observed.

606 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front the underbody of the vehicle.
wheels raised).
NOTE:
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
and remains released, while being towed.
seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 607

• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.

CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.

Front Recovery Points

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.

608 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
pushing the EPB switch down.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section (EARS)
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
in order to move the vehicle.
Response System.

CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 609

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
7

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULE SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625

▫ Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .625

▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .617

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .618

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636

䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

612 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657

▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . .667

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659

▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance. . . . . . . . .668

▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . .661

▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669

▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .663 䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Leather Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 613

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Vehicle Info” in “Display” in “Getting To
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interscheduled maintenance.
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serconcern for fleet customers.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
• Check engine oil level.
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to • Check windshield washer fluid level.
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
on.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
SCHEDULE SERVICING

614 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 615

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Maintenance Plan

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.

8
X

X
X

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

616 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Replace spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.

X
X
X

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 617

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.

618 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Air Cleaner
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

6 — Battery
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Window Washer Fill

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 619

Checking Oil Level

Adding Washer Fluid

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.

CAUTION!

Windshield Washer Fluid Cap

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with

620 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and Maintenance-Free Battery
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
residual washer fluid.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainWhen refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some tenance required.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
WARNING!
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 621

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE

CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.

622 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for
further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 623

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol

Engine Oil Viscosity

MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
This symbol means that the oil has equivalent is recommended for all operating temperabeen certified by the American tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
Petroleum Institute (API). The and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W- engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en- partment” illustration in this section.
gine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numCAUTION!
ber should not be used.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

624 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils

Materials Added To Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 625

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
proper maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommaintenance interval if applicable.
mended.

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

626 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling - R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 627

Body Lubrication

Windshield Wiper Blades

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesCylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
sary.

628 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 629

WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.

630 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System

system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Engine Coolant Checks
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 631

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
further information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)

632 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentracoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that altions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool(−37°C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionmiles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Adding Coolant

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 633

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:

Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomengine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
possible.
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)

634 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.

Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 635

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporprotection of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.

636 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake Master Cylinder
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
sions.
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
further information.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 637

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for

638 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the trans- its performance may be impaired by supplemental addimission fluid at the correct level using the recommended tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
fluid.
may adversely affect seals.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
CAUTION!
used.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
CAUTION!
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacVehicle Limited Warranty.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Fluid Level Check
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “TechThe fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
nical Data” for fluid specifications.
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Special Additives
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
check your transmission fluid level using special service
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 639

tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.

CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
a your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures and Tire
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Loading.
life of the vehicle.
Fluid And Filter Changes

640 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Tire Markings

NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 641

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

642 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 643

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

644 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 645

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading

Tire And Loading Information Placard

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.

646 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 647

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

648 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 649

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

650 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 651

At least once a month:

1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated.
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

652 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 653

Tire Repair

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
meets the following criteria:
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
additional information.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have mode.
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infordiately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and mation.
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

654 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Tire Spinning

Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 655

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

656 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
(Continued)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 657

WARNING! (Continued)
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

658 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 659

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Spare Tires — If Equipped
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
tire rotation pattern.
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.

660 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

WARNING! (Continued)

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 661

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

WARNING! (Continued)

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
first opportunity.
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
WARNING!
against damage:
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In- • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
• Install on front tires only.
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)

662 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 663

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
Tire Rotation Recommendations

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Tire Rotation

664 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforsafety requirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 665

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.

666 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical •
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
•
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper
blades and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking
care not to damage the painted surface by dragging
across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which
will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on
the surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and
check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine cooling system.
Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage
to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into
operation.

NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 667

CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute with
ignition switch in the OFF position and close the
drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and
negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is
closed.

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?

BODYWORK

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

Protection From Atmospheric Agents

The most common causes are:

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

668 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Body And Underbody Maintenance
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

Cleaning Headlights
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakNOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or age than glass headlights.
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma- Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov- different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folthis finish.
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 669

Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
Special Care
and Tar Remover to remove.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
a month.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
open.

670 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, INTERIORS
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
Seats And Fabric Parts
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
carpeting.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
WARNING!
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
packaged and sealed.
Seat Belt Maintenance
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
match the color of your vehicle.
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 671

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

672 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts

CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.

Glass Surfaces
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
leather upholstery.
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear wincan act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deterdirectly on the mirror.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.

TECHNICAL DATA
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680

▫ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . .675

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .681

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678

䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .684

▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . .679

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684

674 TECHNICAL DATA

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686

TECHNICAL DATA 675

IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
9

676 TECHNICAL DATA

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

M12 x 1.5

Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
Wheel Mounting Surface

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
tightening.

TECHNICAL DATA 677

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance
Torque Patterns
when using high quality unleaded “ReguAfter 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
lar” gasoline having a posted octane numsure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
ber of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
against the wheel.
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.

678 TECHNICAL DATA

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these that have these additives will help improve fuel
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perforering service for the vehicle.
mance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Designated TOP TIER Detergent GasoMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

line contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier

TECHNICAL DATA 679

Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.

CAUTION! (Continued)
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as ethanol.
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

CAUTION!

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
(Continued)

Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running

680 TECHNICAL DATA

CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer Fuel System Cautions
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)

TECHNICAL DATA 681

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

682 TECHNICAL DATA

WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

WARNING!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.

TECHNICAL DATA 683

Fuel Requirements

NOTE:

If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
least 5 miles (8 km).
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
When switching fuel types:

684 TECHNICAL DATA

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).

Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)

Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

TECHNICAL DATA 685

Replacement Parts

Maintenance

All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.

CAUTION!

CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.

686 TECHNICAL DATA

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API
Certified)
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

U.S.

Metric

19 Gallons

71 Liters

5 quarts

4.7 liters

13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty
Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling

TECHNICAL DATA 687

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

688 TECHNICAL DATA

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

TECHNICAL DATA 689

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder

Refrigerant

Compressor Oil

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amounts:
Single A/C System — 880g (1.94 lb)
Dual A/C System — 1050g (2.31 lb)
Use only PAG oil PSD-1:
Single A/C System — 140 ml
Dual A/C System — 190 ml

MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 䡵 UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .745
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696

▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747

▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697

▫ Uconnect Theater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .748

▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718

▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater
Rear Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .742

▫ Pairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .750

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743

▫ Unpairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751

692 MULTIMEDIA

▫ Media Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770

▫ Uconnect Theater Remote Control . . . . . . . . . .753 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .770
▫ Uconnect Theater Home Screen And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756
▫ Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions . . . .759
▫ Uconnect Theater Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
▫ Using The Rear Video USB Port . . . . . . . . . . .763
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .769
▫ Rear Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .769

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .770
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .781
▫ Climate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .783

MULTIMEDIA

693

▫ Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .791

▫ Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785

▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .792

▫ Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786

▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792

▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794

▫ Mobile App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794

▫ Voice Texting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .795
▫ Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790

694 MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:

Personalized Menu Bar

1. Press the “Apps

” button to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.

MULTIMEDIA

695

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
installed.
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
WARNING!
your vehicle to function properly.
CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)

696 MULTIMEDIA

WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
UCONNECT SETTINGS
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners the touchscreen and/or buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
should:
access and change the customer programmable features.
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareMany features can vary by vehicle.
update to learn about available Uconnect software
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. Uconnect touchscreen.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

MULTIMEDIA

697

Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In 5.0 Settings
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

698 MULTIMEDIA

button on the faceplate, then press
Push the MORE
the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available programmable features.

KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
time.
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- will be available:
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired • Forward Collision Warning
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
the Back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous collisions. The feature can be can be set to Near, Medium,
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the or Far.
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or • Forward Collision Sensitivity
down through the available settings.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system will warn
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
in the “ON/RUN” position.
The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.

MULTIMEDIA

699

• Forward Collision Warning Active Braking

• Front ParkSense Volume

The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward
Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touchscreen.

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
has been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.

• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display.

• Rear ParkSense Volume
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.

700 MULTIMEDIA

• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist

exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. The KeySense default is “Light & Chime”.
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
Press the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
touchscreen to change the Blind Spot Alert status.
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only enabled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check- not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
had been selected.
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
• Maximum Vehicle Speed
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, 105/110 km/h).
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the

MULTIMEDIA

701

• SiriusXM Setup

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchthe screen or visit the provider online.
screen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To and is available for U.S. residents only.
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would Display
like to skip.
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
• Subscription Information
the following settings will be available.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio • Display Mode
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
services, it will be necessary to access the information “Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
on the Subscription Information screen to re- and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
subscribe.
touchscreen.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.

702 MULTIMEDIA

• Brightness

the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.

When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the Units
touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be- After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
• Language
Driver Information Display (DID). The following selectWhen in this display, you may select one of multiple
able units of measure are listed below:
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- • Custom
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button • Speed
Select from: “mph” or “kph.”
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen.
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Touchscreen Beep
• Fuel Consumption
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
or “km/L.”

MULTIMEDIA

• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”

703

Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
• Sync Time — If Equipped

When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- select from “ON” or “OFF.”
screen the following settings will be available:
Safety/Assistance
Clock & Date

• Set Time and Format

When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then
choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the
corresponding arrow above and below the current time
to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView Backup Camera — If Equipped

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
• Show Time Status — If Equipped
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

704 MULTIMEDIA

8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped
Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” button
on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or
OFF.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid
lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
back up path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.

front of you. The forward collision button is located in
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If
Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can
be set to Far, Med or Near. The default status of FCW+ is
the Med setting. This means the system will warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are a relatively medium distance away. This gives
• Forward Collision Warning On/Off — If Equipped
you the medium reaction time. To change the setting for
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you

MULTIMEDIA

are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW+ status, press and release the “Near” “Med” or
“Far” buttons.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active
Braking — If Equipped
The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist
(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential
forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake
pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake
pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or

705

visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display.
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
equipped). The chime volume settings include
“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
equipped). The chime volume settings include
“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system
will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.

706 MULTIMEDIA

• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point. The default setting is “Medium”.
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped

this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
The default setting is “Lights”

When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” The the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
default setting is “Medium”.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature BSM not operating to specification.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When

MULTIMEDIA

707

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for system function and operating
information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start
Assist” button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.

When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

708 MULTIMEDIA

setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating
that the setting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the sliding doors are opened or closed with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using
the passive entry feature. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the
touchscreen, then select from “On” or “Off.”
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
• Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
• Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On”
or “Off.”

MULTIMEDIA

709

• Daytime Running Lights

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
while the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”

• Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped

• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or
“Off.”

This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”

Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

710 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat To make your selection, press the “Hands Free Lift Gate”
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is • Hands Free Sliding Door
used to unlock the door.
When this feature is selected, the sliding doors can
• Power Liftgate Alert
opened or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the motion. To make your selection, press the “Hands Free
power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your Sliding Door” button on the touchscreen and select from
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the “On” or “Off.”
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sliding Door Alert

When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Hands Free Lift Gate
When this feature is selected, the rear liftgate can opened
or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick motion.

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
on Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”

MULTIMEDIA

711

• Flash Lights With Lock

activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn
With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
“ON” or “OFF.”
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the Passive Entry • Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
or “Off.”
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
• Horn With Lock

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Vethe Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
hicle” for further information.
selection, press the “Horn w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from ⬙Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” • Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
• Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped

When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry
Press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch(RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button, you must push the RKE
screen to change this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is

712 MULTIMEDIA

Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
ger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
unlock on the first press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
button.
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
NOTE: If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperamatter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Touching the handle more than once will only result in Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used showing that setting has been selected.
to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key Fob).
Engine Off Options
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” • Engine Off Power Delay — If Equipped
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
When this feature is selected, the power window
available:
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),

MULTIMEDIA

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped

713

Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.

714 MULTIMEDIA

Once properly set, the compass will automatically com- “YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchthe most accurate compass headings.
screen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view
mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and
it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it
may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Compass Variance Zone Map

• Compass Calibration

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the

MULTIMEDIA

715

setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any • Surround Sound — If Equipped
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
touchscreen.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
• Loudness — If Equipped
directly on the desired setting.
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
• Balance/Fade
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
Fade settings.
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Speed Adjusted Volume

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.

716 MULTIMEDIA

Phone/Bluetooth

• Subscription Information

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
• Paired Phones
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which phones are paired to the the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to the Uconnect Manual Supplement.
to access the Subscription Information screen.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available:
the screen or visit the provider online.
• Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of and is available for U.S. residents only.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.

MULTIMEDIA

Restore Settings

717

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
10

718 MULTIMEDIA

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings

” button, then press the “Settings
Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.

Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings

MULTIMEDIA

719

screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the • Forward Collision Sensitivity
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) This means the
down through the available settings.
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you. The feature can be set to Near,
KeySense
Medium, or Far.
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when ac- • Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
cessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
the following settings will be available:
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The
• Forward Collision Warning
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touchaudible and/or visual warning to potential forward screen.
collisions. The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.

720 MULTIMEDIA

• ParkSense — If Equipped

• Rear ParkSense Volume

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status,
press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound
and Display.”

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.

• Front ParkSense Volume

• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist

When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only enabled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be
enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense
Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.

MULTIMEDIA

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press
the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.

721

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Maximum Vehicle Speed
To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
105/110 km/h).
• SiriusXM Setup
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would
like to skip.

722 MULTIMEDIA

• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to resubscribe.

Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of the display
mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
to access the Subscription Information screen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To When in this display, you may select the brightness with
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the screen or visit the provider online.
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.

MULTIMEDIA

723

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lanthe headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with been selected.
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and • Touchscreen Beep
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
⬙parade⬙ positions.
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
• Set Theme
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
When in this display, you may select the theme for the button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set next to the setting, showing that setting has been seTheme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lected.
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing • Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
• Set Language
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
When in this display, you may select one of multiple With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen

724 MULTIMEDIA

Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark • Speed
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
selected.
• Distance
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as • Fuel Consumption
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro- Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
grammed route. To make your selection, press the “Navi- “km/L.”
gation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Pressure
showing that setting has been selected.
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
Units

• Temperature

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:

MULTIMEDIA

Voice

725

Clock

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length

• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.

This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.

• Show Command List

• Set Time Hours

When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.

726 MULTIMEDIA

• Set Time Minutes

Safety & Driving Assistance

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

• Forward Collision On/Off — If Equipped
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you. The forward collision button is located in
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

MULTIMEDIA

727

• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkaudible and/or visual warning to potential forward
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, Med or
had been selected.
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change zone start point.
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
button.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking

When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The amount of directional torque the steering system can
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The

728 MULTIMEDIA

• ParkSense — If Equipped

indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
ignition cycles.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph • Rear ParkSense Volume
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be sevisual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re- default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your seleclease the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button. tion, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the
• Front ParkSense Volume

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
will retain its last known configuration state through
selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
ignition cycles.
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec- • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
tion, press the “Front ParkSense Vol.” button on the When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.

MULTIMEDIA

• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind

729

Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen

730 MULTIMEDIA

display along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.

“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

Displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle’s
exterior environment while backing up. When this feature is selected, the Surround View Camera can be
enabled or disabled. To make your selection, press the
“Surround View Camera” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the

• Surround View Camera

• Surround View Camera Delay
When activation occurs by pressing a button in the
“Controls” screen, the initial view will be the default
view (associated with current gear state). Image will be
displayed while in that gear as long as vehicle speed

MULTIMEDIA

remains less than 8 mph (12 km/h). When vehicle is
shifted into a different gear (other than ‘REVERSE’), the
image will remain displayed for 10 seconds or until
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), at which point it
will immediately cancel and return to the last viewed
screen.
• Surround View Camera Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you
to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE
or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pushed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display. To make your selection, press the “Surround View Camera Active Guidelines” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected.

731

• Sliding Door Alert
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
10

732 MULTIMEDIA

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.

When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds.

• Brake Service
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.

MULTIMEDIA

733

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.

• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

734 MULTIMEDIA

Doors & Locks

• Flash Lights With Lock

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
screen the following settings will be available:
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
• Auto Door Locks
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock when the without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
vehicle is in motion. To make your selection, press the make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
“Auto Door Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the next to setting, showing that the setting has been sesetting has been selected.
lected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.

MULTIMEDIA

• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

735

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will result in only
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE Key Fob).

When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. • Passive Entry — If Equipped
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
(RKE) Key Fob LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

736 MULTIMEDIA

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the • Power Liftgate Alert
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and • Hands Free Power Liftgate
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
When this feature is selected, hands free technology
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
automatically opens or closes the power liftgate. To make
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Liftgate”
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to selected.
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door.

MULTIMEDIA

737

• Sliding Door Alert

make your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Sliding Door” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
been selected.
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
• Flash Lights With Sliding Door

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

When this feature is selected, the headlights flash when
the sliding door is opening. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
• Hands Free Power Sliding Door
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
When this feature is selected, hands free technology Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
automatically opens or closes the power sliding door. To Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.

738 MULTIMEDIA

button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
Engine Off Options

When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.

• Engine Off Power Delay

Audio

When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.

MULTIMEDIA

739

• Equalizer

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
directly on the desired setting.
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

740 MULTIMEDIA

Phone/Bluetooth

• Channel Skip

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the • Subscription Information
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.”
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
• Paired Audio Sources
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.”
to access the Subscription Information screen.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available:
the screen or visit the provider online.

MULTIMEDIA

741

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription Clear Personal Data
and is available for U.S. residents only.
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the • Clear Personal Data
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
• Restore Settings
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
⬙Personal data cleared”.
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙

742 MULTIMEDIA

System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

MULTIMEDIA

743

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
AUX, etc.).
vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a plugged into the USB port.
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplecontrol is different depending on which mode you are in. ment Manual.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

744 MULTIMEDIA

• In the center console
• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats

Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater USB Port

There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this
vehicle.

Center Console USB Charging Port

MULTIMEDIA

745

UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family
years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect
Theater system.
• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
Rear USB Charging Ports

NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.

• Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB
port
• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.

746 MULTIMEDIA

Getting Started

There are three different ways to operate the features of
the Uconnect Theater:
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio
• The Individual Video Screens

Uconnect Theater Screen
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Radio
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub

MULTIMEDIA

Accessing The System From The Uconnect Radio

747

You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the
radio touchscreen following the steps below:
1. Press the “Media” button.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button icon.
NOTE: The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down to the personalized menu bar to create an
App/shortcut. Refer to “Personalized Menu Bar” in this
section for more information.

Uconnect Theater Button

748 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect Theater Controls

Parents can control certain features of the system with the
“Uconnect Theater Controls” screens, right from the
Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options are:
• Change media sources
• Lock one or both screens
• Mute an individual screen or both screens
• Turn On/Off one or both screens
• Select APPS
• View media while gear selector is in Park

Uconnect Theater Controls Screen
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Power All
Mute All
Lock All
Source Drop Down List

5 — Lock On/Off current screen
6 — Mute On/Off current
screen
7 — Power On/Off current
screen

MULTIMEDIA

749

Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from
the rear screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will automatically
power on.
NOTE: A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to
the system.
Listen In

2. If “YES” is selected to Pair a Remote, Pairing will
immediately start.

Press this button and use the “Listen In” feature to listen
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen
to audio through cabin speakers.
will pop up.
10

750 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

Pairing The Remote

• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to pair the
second remote.
• If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
When watching a video source, pushing “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need
to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens. To
reset all values back to the original settings, select the
Remote Pairing
“Reset to Defaults” then select “YES.”
If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater
system, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the “Settings”

icon on the touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA

751

2. Press the “Remote” button on the touchscreen in the will need to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater
system. To unpair the remote, follow the procedure
settings menu.
below:
3. Select “Pair Remote” and follow the on screen instruc1. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote
tions to complete the pairing process.
section of ⬙Settings and follow the on screen instrucNOTE:
tions to complete the unpairing process.
• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
2. Push and hold the “Screen”, “Down Arrow”, and
pairing is successful/unsuccessful. Repeat the above
“Play/Pause” buttons for 5 seconds, or until the
steps to pair the second remote.
remote screen indicator light flashes.
• If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
3. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.
• The system can accommodate up to 10 paired remote
NOTE: There will be a touchscreen notification message
controls.
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to
Unpairing The Remote
unpair a second remote.
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater software, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote

752 MULTIMEDIA

Users can select content for each screen from the radio by
choosing desired content from drop down menu.

Media Sources

NOTE: Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other in a single press of a button.
Doing this however will disable and gray out certain
player controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s
content.

Media Sources
1 – Available Sources Screen 1
2 – USB Source Playing Screen 2

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect Theater Remote Control

753

2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access “Sources”.
but4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow
tons to highlight an item or scroll through menus.
5. Fast Forward Button
— Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
6. Play/Pause Button
disc play.

Remote Control

㥋 — Begin/resume or pause

7. Fast Rewind Button
— Push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.

1. Gesture Pad — Control mouse pointer position in this
area to move and select items on the touchscreen, 8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in
a menu.
functions similar to a mouse.

754 MULTIMEDIA

9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2 apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
(Passenger Side).
To replace the batteries:
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
previous screen.
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen and wireless
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or
procedures for your area.
off.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or 2) is
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
being controlled by the remote control when a button
battery compartment.
is pushed.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation.

MULTIMEDIA

755

Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls

Uconnect Theater Home Screen
1 — Search Button (Media
Search)
2 — Power Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — Toggle Button List and
Icon View

5 — Source Card Page Indicator 1 or 2
6 — Wired Headphone Volume
7 — Climate Control Button
8 — Home Button
9 — Source Cards

Source Card Selection

You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or
Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen
in one step by choosing the “View Screen” source card.

756 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

NOTE: System information can also be displayed under
General Settings.

• Source card order can be changed by pressing the
Settings button on the touchscreen and scrolling down Remote Settings
to ⬙Source Card Order⬙.
Under this setting, you can access the following:
• Use the “View Screen” function to pull content from • Manage Remotes
one screen to the other. Doing this however will
• Remote sensitivity (This adjusts the speed and sensidisable and gray out certain player controls.
tivity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad)
General Settings
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
To change source card order, select “Source Card ReorUconnect Radio
der”, then press and hold source card on the touchscreen,
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player
and drag and drop in desired order.
with the label facing up. Or insert a USB drive into
You can also adjust the following below and more.
rear Video USB port.
• Brightness
NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player is located under
• Media port lighting on and off
the radio controls in the instrument panel.
• Clock on and off

MULTIMEDIA

757

2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the touchscreen. Refer to “Accessing The System From The
Uconnect Radio” in this section for further information.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls on the
desired screen (1 or 2).
NOTE: To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens
simultaneously, select disc from both screen drop downs.
4. Press “Play” button on the touchscreen.
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player
1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port

758 MULTIMEDIA

Using The Touchscreen Radio

Source Controls — Uconnect Radio
Media Control Screen

NOTE: Control functions apply to individual screen
selected displayed on touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA

1. Power
Press to turn “selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute

759

NOTE: Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.

Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are
headphones.
designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to
3. Lock
access particular features or software on the disc. See the
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and documentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to
see if these buttons can be used.
Touchscreen Controls for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to full screen video if vehicle is not
moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video
source or when the vehicle is in motion.
To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio select the “View”
button while in the selected screen controls, then select
the Disc source from drop down menu.

760 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect Theater Apps

Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
1 — Red Button
2 — Green Button

3 — Blue Button
4 — Yellow Button

Apps Home Screen

MULTIMEDIA

761

• Hanging Fruit
• License Plate Game
• Math Flash Cards
• Solitaire
• Sudoku
• Tic Tac Toe
NOTE: To exit a game, push “Exit Button” than “Back
Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Home Screen

Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games.
Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play
each game. Pick from games:
• Back Seat Bingo
• Checkers

762 MULTIMEDIA

Are We There Yet?
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
radio the second row passengers can use “Are We There
Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time
remaining on navigation routes as well as the estimated
time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications
and frequency can be set up for route information while
in other Uconnect Theater screens too.
NOTE: Route notifications will pop-up at the bottom of
the screen in the center.
Are We There Yet?

MULTIMEDIA

Using The Rear Video USB Port

763

NOTE: To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB jump drive into the port on the DVD/Bluray disc player. The USB jump drive port is located under
the radio controls in the instrument panel.

Rear Video USB Port

Plug in a jump drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device
and play your favorite music or movies.

10
Search Screen

Use the search feature to find your music faster.

764 MULTIMEDIA

Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2
ports, located behind the first row seat.

AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)

MULTIMEDIA

765

CAUTION!
Certain high-end video games will exceed the power
limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to “Power
Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in this
guide for further information.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
Uconnect Theater Headphones
muted and the headphone channel selector button is on
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that 2 — Volume Control Wheel
two new AAA type batteries are installed in the head- 3 — Channel Selection Button
phones.
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.

766 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: Uconnect Theater must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the Uconnect Theater
system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on
the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen,
Headphone Channel Selector Button
use the arrow buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to Replacing The Headphone Batteries
select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
of the remote control.
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

MULTIMEDIA

To replace the batteries:

767

How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.

1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
downward.
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
by Delphi Automotive. Foam earpieces, which will wear
battery compartment.
over time through normal use, are specifically not cov4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
ered (replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). DELPHI AUTOMOTIVE IS NOT LIABLE FOR
Delphi Automotive Stereo Headphone Lifetime
ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPLimited Warranty
ERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILWho Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers URE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS DELPHI
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this AUTOMOTIVE LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPEparticular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless CIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEheadphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
QUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER

768 MULTIMEDIA

DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction.
What Will Delphi Automotive Do? Delphi Automotive,
at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product.
Delphi Automotive reserves the right to replace any
discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN
LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Delphi Automotive wireless headphones, please phone
1-888-293-3332.
You may register your Delphi Automotive wireless headphones by phone at 1-888-293-3332.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s arrow buttons will navigate the
cursor on the rear touchscreen for whichever touchscreen
is selected.
NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play”
the disc if already in the ⬙Disc⬙ source menu on the rear
screens.

MULTIMEDIA

Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed

769

Rear Climate Controls

To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the
screen closed:
Uconnect Theater system. Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.

Rear Climate Controls

770 MULTIMEDIA

General Information

Regulatory And Safety Information

The operation is subject to the following two conditions: USA/CANADA
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

2. This device must accept any interference that may be The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
received including interference that may cause unde- is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
sired operation.
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
body.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some

MULTIMEDIA

situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

771

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
2. This device must accept any interference received,
more of the following measures:
including interference that may cause undesired op1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
eration.
receiver.
NOTE:
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio techni• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
cian for help.
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

772 MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0, 8.4 or
8.4 NAV system.

Uconnect 5.0

MULTIMEDIA

773

Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV

If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4 system.

774 MULTIMEDIA

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4 Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call

MULTIMEDIA

775

Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect 5.0

776 MULTIMEDIA

Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

Uconnect 8.4

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 5.0 Radio

777

Uconnect 8.4 Radio

778 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media

. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media

MULTIMEDIA

779

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios, your
system is ready. Visit UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 8.4 Media

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
10

780 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 8.4 Phone

Uconnect 5.0 Phonebook

MULTIMEDIA

Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
and say . After the beep, say:
the Phone button
“Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.

781

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.

782 MULTIMEDIA

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”

MULTIMEDIA

783

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
use your voice to send a text message.
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
10
Uconnect 8.4 Climate

784 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the
beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
Navigation

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:

. After

• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4 Navigation

. After

MULTIMEDIA

785

Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

Uconnect Access

9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

Remote Vehicle Start**

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.

Yelp Search

Remote Horn and Lights
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.

NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
***Extra charges apply.
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,

786 MULTIMEDIA

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.

To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App
Assist Button

2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

MULTIMEDIA

787

3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:

Mobile App

To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.

• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.

788 MULTIMEDIA

You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
to send a personalized text message. For details about
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesMAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
sage to John Smith.”
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
process your message.
Voice Texting

3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”

MULTIMEDIA

789

TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.

iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”

790 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you. Please refer to the procedure below to
launch a Yelp search:
Yelp

1. Push the VR button
YELP.

. After the beep, say: Launch

2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
Yelp

MULTIMEDIA

791

SiriusXM Travel Link
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV
system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather

SiriusXM Travel Link

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
10

792 MULTIMEDIA

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands
on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful
tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages
Siri Eyes Free Available
and many other useful requests.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes

MULTIMEDIA

793

on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your so you can still place a second call without being intermissed calls and text messages while you were using Do rupted by incoming calls.
Not Disturb.
NOTE:
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmessage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
hones.
and send it to voicemail.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
Automatic reply messages can be:
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
10

794 MULTIMEDIA

• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
fications were met.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Additional Information
General Information

© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
received including interference that may cause undetrademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
sired operation.
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
NOTE:
trademarks of Yelp.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect System Support:

795

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchdays a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
ing the disc.
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
or anti-static sprays.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coatTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .798

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .799
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .799
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .800

▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .803

798 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 799

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247-9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

800 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Service Contract

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 801

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.

WARNING!

802 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 803

In Canada

Service Manuals

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

804 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Owner’s Manuals

Call toll free at:

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

INDEX

806 INDEX

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .409
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325, 342
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 608
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 609
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .343
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 342, 375
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .625
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 143
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 132, 625
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 261
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

INDEX 807

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 686
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .132
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 639
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639, 689
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637, 638
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637, 689
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .194

Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 620
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636, 689
12

808 INDEX

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 537, 543
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 497
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 599
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Changing A Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 367
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .363
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . .354
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . .350
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

INDEX 809

Using The Top Tether Anchorage . .
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .369
. . . . . . . . . .678
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.668
.124
.124
.192
.384
.795
.659
.229

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.743
.743
.800
.633
.630
.632
.686

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630, 634
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .631, 686, 687
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 260
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 376
12

810 INDEX

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .194
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .405, 409
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .238
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .494, 497
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .215
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 562, 639
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242
Door Locks
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . .745

INDEX 811

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686, 687
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . .341, 608
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679, 682
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 628
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 377, 537, 543
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 687
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
12

812 INDEX

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 377, 542
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682, 683
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 544
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘N Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679, 682
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 687
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .175, 182
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

INDEX 813

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .115
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
. . .524 Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
. . .529 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
. . .540
. . .668 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 529
. . .112 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214, 239, 246, 254
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
. . .115
. . .540 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
. . .112 Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.678
.678
.398
.672
.507
.507
.504

814 INDEX

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 543
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 342, 375
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537, 543

INDEX 815

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 260
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 543
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 544
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .250
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .120
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 543
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .251, 293
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 377, 542
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .254
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 504
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
12

816 INDEX

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .250
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 107
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 529
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 192
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 687
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 687
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 687

INDEX 817

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 686
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 106
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 803

Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 447
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .644
Power
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .194
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 87
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
12

818 INDEX

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .633
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 36
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Rear Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 143
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 497
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 447
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .742
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

INDEX 819

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . .
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.375
.377
.802
.374
.639
.373
.613

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.311
.318
.318
.309
.306
.311
.317
.316
.318

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 375
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .311
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 306, 309
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 85, 94
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59, 63, 85
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
12

820 INDEX

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 87
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 254, 377, 542
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 659, 660, 661
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 409
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 383
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

INDEX 821

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . .644
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 649, 659, 664
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .742
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 659
Stow n VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 562, 639
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . .322
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644, 645
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .220, 293
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .132
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
12

822 INDEX

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639, 649
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 659, 660, 661
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .521
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 637
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .175
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654

INDEX 823

Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 542

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786
Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .734
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .743
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677

Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Stow n VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 192
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 645
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
12

824 INDEX

Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 376
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 619
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 121
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : 1st Edition
Create Date                     : 2016:01:07 14:52:37-05:00
Keywords                        : 2172813
Modify Date                     : 2016:04:29 09:09:25-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2016:04:29 09:09:25-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:49D2B60D77B5E511AB03D097FED7C3A0
Instance ID                     : uuid:6b227272-ff71-4cf8-8c43-8a3167137598
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:8040c0ef-5f1e-4f1e-ae03-a303200d947e
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:92745908-87e7-42ca-a00b-32df1c82dc4a
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2017 Chrysler Pacifica Owner's Manual
Description                     : 17RU-126-AA
Creator                         : 1st Edition
Subject                         : 2172813
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 828

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2017 Chrysler Pacifica Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation